Мануал бмв 3 2013

Owner’s Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

THE BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN. OWNER’S MANUAL.

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

3 Series Owner’s Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner’s Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner’s Manual in your vehicle. It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner’s Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English X/13, 11 13 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN OWNERS MANUAL 1402926810

We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Owners Manual. These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.

1. Where the terms service center, the service center, your service center, service specialist, or service are used in the Owners Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

2. Where the text of the Owners Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a service center or your service center, we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

While BMW of North America LLC, at no cost to you, will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your

vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops.

3. Where the Owners Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.

4. At page 7, under the warranty sections discussion of homologation, where it states that you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there, the text should read that you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.

5. At page 7, under the Parts and Accessories section, in the fifth sentence, the word cannot should read does not.

6. At page 53, in the Checking and replacing safety belts section, the

Addendum

text beginning, Have the work performed only by your service center . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly.

7. At page 90, under the heading: Special windshield, the paragraph beginning, Therefore have the special windshield . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends that you have the special windshield replaced by the service center.

8. At page 168 under the heading: Objects within the range of movement of the pedals and at page 226 under the heading: Carpets and floor mats, the paragraph that begins: Only use floor mats . . . should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place.

9. At page 195, under the heading: Mounting, the paragraph beginning, Have mounting and balancing . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends that you have mounting and balancing performed

by your service center or a tire mounting specialist.

10. At page 196, under the heading: Approved wheels and tires, the term Approved should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term Recommended should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non- recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle.

11. At page 197, under the heading: Snow Chains, the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Addendum

Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center.

12. At page 199, under the heading Hood, the sentence beginning, If you are unfamiliar should be disregarded.

13. At page 202, under the heading: Approved oil types, the references to Approved should be read as Suitable. Immediately preceding the Gasoline engine chart, the following sentence should be inserted: Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: . . .

14. At page 202, under the heading: Alternative oil types, the text preceding the chart should be disregarded, and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: . . . The reference to specification should be read as rating.

15. At page 202, under the heading: Engine oil change, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:

BMW recommends that you have the oil changed at your BMW dealers service center or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with BMW specifications.

16. At page 204, under the heading: Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models, the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle.

17. At page 207 and page 210, where it reads: Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps, that text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: Xenon headlamp work or replacement can cause serious and fatal injuries. In the text that follows, where it reads: [h]ave any work on the xenon lighting system . . . , the following words should be read as preceding that passage: It is strongly suggested that you . . . .

18. At page 215, under the Battery replacement section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu

Addendum

thereof the following text should be read:

Use of recommended vehicle batteries

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.

After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any check control messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 234.

6 Notes

At a glance 14 Cockpit 18 iDrive 26 Voice activation system 29 Integrated Owner’s Manual in the vehicle

Controls 34 Opening and closing 49 Adjusting 59 Transporting children safely 63 Driving 75 Displays 91 Lamps 96 Safety 116 Driving stability control systems 121 Driving comfort 144 Climate control 151 Interior equipment 159 Storage compartments

Driving tips 166 Things to remember when driving 169 Loading 172 Saving fuel

Mobility 180 Refueling 182 Fuel 187 Wheels and tires 198 Engine compartment 200 Engine oil 203 Coolant 204 Maintenance 206 Replacing components 217 Breakdown assistance 223 Care

Reference 230 Technical data 234 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Notes Using this Owner’s Manual Orientation The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner’s Manuals are located in the ap pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

User’s manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com munication and the short commands of the voice activation system are described in a sep arate user’s manual, which is also included with the onboard literature.

Additional sources of information The service center will be happy to answer any other questions you may have. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the ve hicle. Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion. «…» Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions.

… Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system. … Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele

vant section of this Owner’s Manual for infor mation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipment This Owner’s Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner’s Manual, equipment is also described and illustrated that is not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or the country- specific variants. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner’s Handbook, refer to the Supple mentary Owner’s Handbooks. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus trations.

Status of the Owner’s Manual Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan

Seite 6

Notes

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de scribed in this Owner’s Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner’s Manuals are located in the ap pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

For your own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require ments applying in the country of first delivery — homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper ating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homolo gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and Accessories BMW recommends using parts and accessories approved by BMW for this purpose. Your BMW center is the right contact for genuine BMW parts and accessories, other products approved by BMW and related qualified advice. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee is also not applicable when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential operating conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW’s own stringent quality standards.

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts, including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit

Seite 7

Notes

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Federal Emissions System Defect War

ranty. Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. California Emission Control System Lim

ited Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance meas ures: BMW Maintenance system Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Data memory Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo rarily or permanently store technical informa tion about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally documents the state of a component, a mod ule, a system or the environment: Operating states of system components,

fill levels for instance. Status messages for the vehicle and from

its individual components, e.g., wheel rota tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration.

Malfunctions and faults in important sys tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.

Responses by the vehicle to special situa tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en gagement of stability control systems.

Ambient conditions, such as temperature. This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re pair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical infor mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, in

Seite 8

Notes

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

cluding the manufacturer, using special diag nostic tools. You can obtain further information there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis. When the vehicle is in use, situations are con ceivable in which it might be possible to asso ciate this technical data with individuals if it is combined with other information, e.g., an acci dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit ness accounts possibly with the assistance of an expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were

operating. Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened. How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal. How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Seite 9

Notes

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehi cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 10

Notes

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Seite 11

Notes

11 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Cockpit Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Roller sunblinds47 2 Rear window safety switch46 3 Power windows45 4 Exterior mirror operation56 5 Glove compartment on the driver’s

side159 Driver assistance systems

Active Blind Spot Detec tion114

Intelligent Safety104 Collision warning with City Brak ing function105. Lane departure warning112

6 Lamps

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Front fog lamps94

Parking lamps91

Low beams91

Automatic headlamp con trol92 Daytime running lights92 Adaptive Light Control92 High-beam Assistant93 Instrument lighting94

7 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal68

High beams, head lamp flasher68

High-beam Assistant93

Roadside parking lamps92

Computer86

8 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed128,121

Resume speed129,121

Cruise control on/off, interrupt ing128

Active Cruise Control on/off, in terrupting121

Reduce distance124

Increase distance124

Cruise control rocker switch129,123

9 Instrument cluster75 10 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation26

Telephone, see user’s manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Thumbwheel for selection lists85

11 Steering column stalk, right Windshield wipers68

Rain sensor69

Clean the windshields and head lamps70

12 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off64

Auto Start/Stop function65

13 Horn 14 Steering wheel heating58

15 Adjust steering wheel58 16 Unlock hood199

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

All around the center console

1 Headliner17 2 Control Display18 3 Ventilation149 4 Hazard warning system217

Central locking system37

5 Glove compartment159 6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user’s manual

for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu nication

7 Climate control144 8 Controller with buttons18

9 Parking brake67 10 PDC Park Distance Control130

Rearview camera133 Parking assistant138 Surround View132

11 Driving Dynamics Control118

DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol116

12 Automatic transmission selector lever71 Manual transmission selector lever71

Seite 16

At a glance Cockpit

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

All around the headliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re quest217

2 Glass sunroof, powered47

3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag98

4 Reading lamps94

5 Interior lamps94

Seite 17

Cockpit At a glance

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

iDrive Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multi tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle’s occupants and to other road users, never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

Controls at a glance Controls

1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on

the equipment version, with touchpad

Control Display

Hints To clean the Control Display, follow the

care instructions. Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button. 2. «Switch off control display»

Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.

Controller with navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings. Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller.

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press the but ton

Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

Press the but ton

Function

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings. 1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in two directions.

Seite 19

iDrive At a glance

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Buttons on controller

Press the but ton

Function

MENU Open the main menu.

Audio Open audio menu last lis tened to, switch between au dio menus.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating concept Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner’s Manual In the Owner’s Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., «Settings».

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., «Radio», a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ ous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.

Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previ ous display.

Seite 20

At a glance iDrive

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi cate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed. Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The «Options» menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the «Options» menu is displayed.

Options menu The «Options» menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, e.g., «Split screen».

This area remains unchanged. Control options for the selected main

menu, e.g., for «Radio». If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, e.g., «Store station».

Changing settings 1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller:

Selecting functions 1. «Settings» 2. «Touchpad» 3. Select the desired function.

«Speller»: enter letters and numbers. «Interactive map»: operating the inter

active map. «Browser»: enter Internet addresses. «Audio feedback»: the entered letters

and numbers are announced.

Entering letters and numbers The entry of the letters requires some practice at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to the following:

Seite 21

iDrive At a glance

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

For the input of upper/lower case letters and numbers, it may be necessary to switch via the controller to the correspond ing Input mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical.

Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display.

Always enter accompanying signs, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. The possibility of input depends on the set language. Where nec essary, enter special characters via the controller.

To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad.

To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad.

To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the upper area of the touchpad.

To enter an underscore, slide to the right in the lower area of the touchpad.

Using interactive map and Internet The interactive map in the navigation system and Internet sites can be moved via the touch pad.

Function Controls

Move interactive map or Internet sites.

Slide in the corre sponding direction.

Enlarge/shrink interac tive map or Internet sites.

Drag inwards or outwards on the touchpad with the fingers.

Display the menu or open a link in the Inter net.

Tap once.

Changing settings Settings on the control display, such as the volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do this slide to the left or right accordingly.

Example: setting the clock Setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until «Settings» is high lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display «Time/Date».

4. Turn the controller until «Time/Date» is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Seite 22

At a glance iDrive

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

5. Turn the controller until «Time:» is high lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Time. Current entertainment source. Sound output, on/off. Wireless network reception strength. Telephone status. Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network reception strength. Symbol flashes: network search.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Text message was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter the PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote database.

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switched off.

Seite 23

iDrive At a glance

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the onboard computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button. 2. «Split screen»

Selecting the display

1. Press the button. 2. «Split screen» 3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected. 4. Press the controller or select «Split screen

content». 5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina

tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Without navigation system and telephone Only radio stations can be stored on the but tons, refer to user’s manual for Navigation, En tertainment, Communication.

Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Running a function Press the button. The function will run immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

To display short information: touch the button.

To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.

Seite 24

At a glance iDrive

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for

approx. five seconds. 2. «OK»

Entering letters and numbers General information 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num

bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed. 3. «OK»: confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the let ter or number.

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between cases, letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Move the controller up.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.

The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during the

entry for which data is available. Destination search: town/city names can

be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.

Seite 25

iDrive At a glance

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Voice activation system Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The concept Most functions that are displayed on the

Control Display can be operated by spoken commands via the voice activation system. The system prompts you to make your en tries.

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system.

The system uses a special microphone on the driver’s side.

… Verbal instructions in the Owner’s Manual to use with the voice activation system.

Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi fied. Set the language, refer to page 88.

Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.

The command is displayed in the instru ment cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function in this case via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steer ing wheel or End.

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on which menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis play. Short commands exist for many functions. Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can also be selected via the voice activation sys tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they are displayed in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloud You can have the available commands read out loud for you: commands For example, if the «Settings» menu is dis played, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

Seite 26

At a glance Voice activation system

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, nearly irrespective of which menu item is currently selected, e.g., Vehicle status. List of short commands of the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com munication Owner’s Manual.

Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: Help Additional commands for the help dialog: Help with examples: information about the

current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are an nounced.

Help voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice acti vation system is announced.

Example: playing back a CD Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Media menu The medium last played is played back.

4. C D 5. C D drive 6. Disc … Track …, e.g., CD track 4.

Via short command Playback of the CD can also be started via a short command.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Disc … Track …, e.g., CD track 4.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form.

1. «Settings» 2. «Language/Units» 3. «Speech type:» 4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an in struction until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the remote con

trol currently in use.

Seite 27

Voice activation system At a glance

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Hints on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish ment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 217, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Seite 28

At a glance Voice activation system

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Integrated Owner’s Manual in the vehicle Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Integrated Owner’s Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner’s Manual can be dis played on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are descri bed therein.

Components of the Integrated Owner’s Manual The Integrated Owner’s Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor mation or access possibilities.

Quick Reference Guide Located in the Quick Reference is important information for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving.

Search by pictures Information and descriptions based on illustra tions can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed.

Owner’s Manual Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index.

Select components

1. Press the button. 2. Turn the controller: open «Vehicle Info». 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range:

«Quick reference» «Search by pictures» «Owner’s Manual»

Leafing through the Owner’s Manual

Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed.

Page by page without link access Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page.

Leaf back.

Leaf forward.

Seite 29

Integrated Owner’s Manual in the vehicle At a glance

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Context help — Owner’s Manual to the temporarily selected function The relevant information can be opened di rectly.

Opening via the iDrive To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu:

1. Press the button or move the control ler to the right repeatedly until the «Options» menu is displayed.

2. «Display Owner’s Manual»

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: «Display Owner’s Manual»

Changing between a function and the Owner’s Manual To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner’s Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays:

1. Press the button or move the control ler to the right repeatedly until the «Options» menu is displayed.

2. «Display Owner’s Manual» 3. Select the desired page in the Owner’s

Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last.

5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner’s Manual displayed last.

To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner’s Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information The Owner’s Manual can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly.

Storing 1. «Owner’s Manual» Select via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Executing Press the button. The Owner’s Manual is displayed im

mediately.

Seite 30

At a glance Integrated Owner’s Manual in the vehicle

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Seite 31

Integrated Owner’s Manual in the vehicle At a glance

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort

and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Opening and closing Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Remote control/key General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with keys. Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro file, refer to page 35. Information on the required maintenance is stored in the remote control as well. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 204

At a glance

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the trunk lid 4 Panic mode in alarm system

Integrated key

Press the button on the back of the remote control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: Driver’s door. Glove compartment on the front passenger

side.

The front passenger glove compartment con tains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 41.

Replacing the battery

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control.

2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart

ment, arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the

positive side facing upwards. 5. Press the cover closed.

Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.

New remote controls New remote controls are available from the service center.

Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.

Emergency detection of remote control It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: Interference of radio transmission to re

mote control by external sources. Discharged battery in the remote control. Interference of radio transmission by mo

bile devices in close proximity to the re mote control.

Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo bile devices in the vehicle.

A Check Control message is displayed if an at tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control

Automatic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the re mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the

Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake. Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch pedal.

Personal Profile The concept You can set several of your vehicle’s functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. The settings are automatically saved in the

profile currently activated. The remote control used is detected when

the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro file is called up.

Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.

The individual settings are stored for three Personal Profiles and one guest profile.

Transmitting the settings Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Profile function. Additional information is avail able from the service center. The settings are transmitted as follows: Via the USB interface for data transfer. BMW Online.

Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Profile management

Opening the profiles A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control cur rently in use.

1. «Settings» 2. «Profiles» 3. Select a profile. Called up profile is assigned to the remote control being used at the time.

Renaming profiles 1. «Settings» 2. «Profiles»

The current profile is selected. 3. Open «Options». 4. «Rename current profile»

Resetting profiles The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values.

1. «Settings» 2. «Profiles»

The current profile is selected. 3. Open «Options». 4. «Reset current profile»

Importing profiles Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile.

1. «Settings» 2. «Profiles» 3. «Import profile» 4. BMW Online: «BMW Online»

USB interface: «USB device»

Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop for example.

1. «Settings» 2. «Profiles» 3. «Export profile» 4. BMW Online: «BMW Online»

USB interface: «USB device»

Using the guest profile The guest profile can be used to make individ ual settings without affecting the three Per sonal Profiles. This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile.

1. «Settings» 2. «Profiles»

The current profile is selected. 3. Open «Guest». 4. Adjust the settings. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.

Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile.

1. «Settings» 2. «Profiles» 3. Open «Options». 4. «Display user list at startup»

Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. Collision warning: warning time. Exterior mirror position.

Seite 36

Controls Opening and closing

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to last.

Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings. Driving Dynamics Control: sport program Driver’s seat position: automatically re

trieved after unlocking. Programmable memory buttons: assign

ment. Head-up Display: selection, brightness,

position and rotation of the display. Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set

ting. Tone: tone settings. Automatic climate control/Automatic cli

mate control with enhanced features: set tings.

Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice output on/off.

Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the signal tone volume.

Radio: stored stations, station listened to last, special settings.

Rearview camera: selection of functions and type of display.

Side View: selection of the display type. Language on the Control Display. Lane departure warning: last setting, on/

off. Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,

on/off. Daytime running lights: current setting. Triple turn signal activation. Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or

after starting to drive.

Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver’s door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following: Doors. Trunk lid. Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside Via the remote control. Via the door handles of the driver’s and

front passenger doors. The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re mote control: Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,

the theft protection is activated/deacti vated. Theft protection prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock but tons or the door opener.

The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off.

The alarm system, refer to page 44, is armed or disarmed.

Operating from the inside

Via the button for the central locking system. If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.

Seite 37

Opening and closing Controls

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control

General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking Press the button on the remote con trol.

The vehicle is unlocked. Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy lamps are switched on.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. Create the settings, refer to page 43.

Convenient opening The remote control can be used to simultane ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.

Press and hold the button on the re mote control.

The windows and the glass sunroof open. Releasing the button stops the motion.

Locking Press the button on the remote control.

Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Switching on interior lamps and courtesy lamps

Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

If the button is pressed again within 10 sec onds of when the vehicle was locked Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti- theft warning system, refer to page 45, are switched off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote con trol for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Opening the trunk lid Press the button on the remote con trol for approx. 1 second.

The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con trol if the vehicle has been unlocked.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.

Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Malfunction If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un locked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interfer ence from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver’s door at the door lock using the integrated key.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID: LX8766S. LX8766E. LX8CAS. LX8CAS2. MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful inter

ference, and this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information

Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control. Only the driver’s door is unlocked or locked via the door lock.

Locking the doors and trunk lid at once To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us ing the button for the central locking sys tem in the interior.

2. Unlock and open the driver’s or front pas senger door.

3. Lock the vehicle. Lock the driver’s door using the

integrated key in the door lock, or Press down the lock button of the front

passenger door and close the door from the outside.

Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control.

Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un lock the vehicle using the integrated key via the door lock on the driver’s door.

Opening and closing: from the inside Locking and unlocking

Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the doors and the trunk lid when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Unlocking and opening Either unlock the doors together using the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the arm rest or

Pull the door opener twice individually on each door: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Trunk lid Opening During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening.

Opening from the outside

Press the button on the trunk lid.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with no-touch activation, refer to page 42.

Opening from the inside Push the button in the driver’s foot well.

If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if it is not locked.

Closing

Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid.

Seite 40

Controls Opening and closing

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re sult.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Locking separately The trunk lid can be locked separately with the switch in the front passenger glove compart ment.

Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. Trunk lid not secured, ar

row 2.

Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the central locking system. If the glove compartment on the front passen ger side is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infrared remote con trol can be handed out without the key.

Emergency unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks.

Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Convenient closing. Unlocking of the trunk lid separately. Open trunk lid with no-touch activation. Start the engine.

Functional requirements There are no external sources of interfer

ence nearby. To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds. The engine can only be started if the re

mote control is in the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons of the remote control or Comfort Access.

Seite 41

Opening and closing Controls

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Unlocking

Grasp the door handle on the driver’s or front passenger door completely, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button on the remote control.

Locking

Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button on the remote control. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle.

Convenient closing Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger and hold it down. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed.

Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure

that no one becomes trapped.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing the but ton on the remote control.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Opening trunk lid with no-touch activation With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be opened with no-touch activation using the re mote control you are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid opens.

Foot movement to be carried out Do not touch vehicle With the foot motion, make sure there is

steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from hot exhaust system parts.

1. Place in the center behind the vehicle, about arm’s length from the trunk lid.

2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far under the vehicle as possible and immedi ately pull it back. With this movement, the

Seite 42

Controls Opening and closing

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors.

Opening The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Before the opening, the hazard warning sys tem flashes.

Preventing inadvertent opening In situations where the trunk lid should is

not to be opened with no-touch activation, en sure that the remote control is located beyond the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car. Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad vertently, for example by an unintentional or misinterpreted movement of the foot.

Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sour ces such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. In this case, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock. If there is a malfunction, open the trunk lid with the remote control button or with the button on the trunk lid.

Adjusting Unlocking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. «Settings» 2. «Doors/key» 3. Select symbol or «Unlock button:» 4. Select the desired function:

«Driver’s door only» Only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un locks the entire vehicle.

«All doors» The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or the country-specific variant, you can set whether the doors are also unlocked with the

button on the remote control.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. «Settings» 2. «Doors/key» 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir

mation signals. «Acoustic sig. lock/unlock» «Flash when lock/unlock»

Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. «Settings» 2. «Doors/key» 3. Select the desired function:

«Lock if no door is opened»

Seite 43

Opening and closing Controls

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened.

«Lock after start driving» The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.

Retrieving the seat and mirror settings The driver’s seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur rently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure

that the footwell behind the driver’s seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob jects damaged when the seat is moved back.

The adjustment procedure is interrupted: When a seat position switch is pressed. When a button of the seat and mirror mem

ory is pressed.

Activating the setting 1. «Settings» 2. «Doors/key» 3. «Last seat position autom.»

Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk

lid. Movements in the vehicle. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at

tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car.

Interruptions in battery voltage.

The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: By sounding an acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning sys

tem. By flashing the daytime running lights.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac cess at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control.

Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened even when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote con trol for approx. 1 second.

With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with no-touch activation, refer to page 42. After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again if the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con trol if the vehicle was unlocked first.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Seite 44

Controls Opening and closing

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Press the button on the remote con trol for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching off the alarm To terminate the alarm: Unlock the vehicle using the remote con

trol. With Comfort Access: If you are carrying

the remote control with you, grasp the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed.

The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sen sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.

The indicator lamp goes out after unlock ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.

Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: In automatic car washes. In duplex garages. During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer. When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle

is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Power windows General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the power windows and in jure themselves.

Seite 45

Opening and closing Controls

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held.

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The window opens automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenient opening, refer to page 38, via the remote control.

Closing Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically. Pressing the switch stops the motion.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is inter rupted.

The window reopens slightly. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window’s closing path is clear; other wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the

range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.

Closing without the pinch protection system

Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec tion.

Safety switch The safety switch in the driver’s door can be used to prevent children, for example, from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear.

Switching on and off Press the button.

Seite 46

Controls Opening and closing

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transport

ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without super vision.

Roller sunblinds Roller sunblind for rear window

General information If you are no longer able to move the roller sun blind for the rear window after having activated it a number of times in a row, the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat ing. Let the system cool. The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot be moved at low interior temperatures.

Extending or retracting roller blind for rear window

Press the button.

Roller sunblinds for the rear side windows Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook it onto the bracket.

Do not open the window while the roller sunblind is raised.

Do not open the window while the roller sun blind is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of damage at high speeds that may result in per sonal injury.

Glass sunroof, powered General information The glass sunroof is operational when the igni tion is switched on.

Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them selves.

Tilting the glass sunroof Push switch upward briefly. Closed roof is tilted open. The opened roof closes until

it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor stays com pletely open.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together

Slide switch back to the re sistance point and hold. Glass sunroof and sliding vi sor open together as long as the switch is held down.

Press switch back past the resistance point.

Seite 47

Opening and closing Controls

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The glass sunroof and sliding visor open automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening motion.

Analogously, the glass sunroof is closed by sliding the switch forward. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand. Convenient operation, refer to page 38, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 42, with Comfort Access.

Comfort position Stops the roof in the comfort position if the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passenger compartment. If desired, continue the movement by pressing the switch.

Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. The glass sunroof opens again slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof’s closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.

Closing from the open position without pinch protection For example, if there is an external danger, pro ceed as follows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the re sistance point and hold.

Pinch protection is limited and the roof re opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised position without pinch protection If there is an external danger, push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The roof closes without pinch protection.

Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the roof can only be operated to a limited extent.

Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. During the initialization, the roof closes without pinch protection.

Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is com plete: Initialization begins within

15 seconds and is com pleted when the sunroof is completely closed.

The roof closes without pinch protection.

Seite 48

Controls Opening and closing

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Adjusting Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 52. Head restraints, refer to page 53. Airbags, refer to page 96.

Seats General information

Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driv

ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Also on the front passenger side, do not incline the backrest on the front passenger side too far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.

Manually adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Forward/backward 2 Thigh support 3 Seat tilt 4 Backrest width 5 Lumbar support 6 Height 7 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat for ward or back slightly to make sure it engages properly.

Seite 49

Adjusting Controls

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Height

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Seat tilt

Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat engages properly.

Electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Seat and mirror memory 2 Backrest width 3 Lumbar support 4 Backrest tilt 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Note The seat setting for the driver’s seat is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer to page 44, is activated for this purpose.

Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back.

Seite 50

Controls Adjusting

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

2. Height.

3. Seat tilt.

4. Backrest tilt.

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Press the front/rear section of the switch. The curvature is increased/ decreased.

Press the upper/lower sec tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down.

Backrest width Change the width of the back rest using the side wings to ad just the lateral support.

Seite 51

Adjusting Controls

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Front seat heating

Switching on Press the button once for each tem perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.

Rear seat heating

Switching on Press the button once for each tem perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.

Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has five seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Number of safety belts Your vehicle has been fitted with five safety belts for the safety of you and your passen gers. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.

Hints Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. To protect the occupants, the belt locking trig gers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. The shoulder strap’s anchorage point will

be correct for adult seat occupants of ev ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for pas sengers sitting on the left and right.

The center rear seat belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger.

Seite 52

Controls Adjusting

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger’s lap.

Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable objects, or be pinched.

Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull

the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the restraining effect reduced.

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for driver’s and passenger’s seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig nal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The

safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

Head restraints in the front Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.

Seite 53

Adjusting Controls

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Adjusting the height

To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

Tilt Three different tilt positions are available.

Forward: pull the top edge of the head re straint forward, arrow 1.

Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head restraint folds as far back as possible.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able.

Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Seite 54

Controls Adjusting

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Adjusting the height

To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down. The center head restraint cannot be adjusted in elevation.

Folding down head restraints Extending/retracting head restraint Only fold down head restraint if no pas

sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted headrests again if passengers are being car ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.

Fold back up: pull up head restraints.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able.

Seat and mirror memory Hints

Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while

driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat could result in an accident.

Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep

the seat’s area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people can be injured or objects damaged.

Seite 55

Adjusting Controls

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

General information

Two different driver’s seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored and retrieved for each remote control. Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out.

If the M button is pressed accidentally: Press the button again. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings

Comfort function 1. Open the driver’s door. 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. The procedure stops when a switch for adjust ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode 1. Close the driver’s door or switch on the ig

nition.

2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com pleted.

Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: Open and close the door or trunk lid. Press a button on the remote control. Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors Exterior mirrors

At a glance

1 Adjusting 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out

General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver’s side mirror.

Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.

Seite 56

Controls Adjusting

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the mirror setting is stored for the remote control in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re mote control, the position is automatically re trieved if the setting for this function is active.

Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positions Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 55

Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb Monitor

The concept When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when park ing, for example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver’s side mirror position.

2. Engage transmission position R.

Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger side mirror position.

Fold in and out Press the button.

Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous In car washes. In narrow streets. For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before washing the car in an automatic

car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim med. Photocells are used for control in the In terior rear view mirror, refer to page 58.

Seite 57

Adjusting Controls

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature

The concept

Photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass. On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirement For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel General information

Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi tion.

3. Fold the lever back.

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 58

Controls Adjusting

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The right place for children Note

Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.

Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro vided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deacti

vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen ger airbags, refer to page 98.

Note Deactivated front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Installing child restraint fixing systems Before mounting Before mounting child restraint fixing systems, ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked.

Hints Manufacturer’s information for child re straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro tective effect can be impaired.

Lock the rear seat backrests in position Before installation of child restraint sys

tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against the backrest and securely latch all backrests. Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be cause of unexpected movement of the rear seat backrest.

Seite 59

Transporting children safely Controls

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas senger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto matically, refer to page 98.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest position to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height af ter this.

Backrest width Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front pas senger seat, open the backrest width com pletely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position.

Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing

system in the front passenger seat, the back rest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system

with the belt. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren.

Note Manufacturer’s information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufac turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.

Seite 60

Controls Transporting children safely

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.

Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix ing system, pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system.

Without a through-loading system: Position

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo cated in the gap between the seat and back rest.

With a through-loading system: Position

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo cated behind the indicated covers.

Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re

fer to the user’s manual of the system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop

erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

Mounting points

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are two outer or three mounting points for child re straint fixing systems with a tether strap.

Seite 61

Transporting children safely Controls

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Note Mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the up

per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.

Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure that the upper retaining strap

is not routed over the head restraints or sharp edges and is free of twisting on its way to the upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in an accident.

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eye 5 Rear window shelf 6 Seat backrest 7 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Remove the mounting point cover. 2. Raise the head restraint. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the mounting eye.

5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

Locking the doors and windows Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver’s door if children are being transported in the

rear.

This locks various functions so that they can not be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 46.

Seite 62

Controls Transporting children safely

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Start/Stop button The concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. Automatic transmission: The engine starts if the brake is de

pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission: the engine starts if the clutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button but do not depress the brake. Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/ Stop button, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Note If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition off Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button again, but do not depress the brake. Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/ Stop button again, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Transmission position P with the ignition off

When ignition is switched off, selector lever position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off acciden tally.

The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: When locking the vehicle, and when the

low beams are activated. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.

When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.

While the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, if the driver’s door is open and the low beams are switched off.

Seite 63

Driving Controls

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

When the ignition is switched off, by opening or closing the driver’s door or unbuckling the driver’s seat belt, the radio ready state remains active.

Radio ready state Activate radio ready state: When the engine is running: press the

Start/Stop button. Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation. The radio ready state switches off automati cally: After approx. 8 minutes. When the vehicle is locked using the cen

tral locking system. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started.

Starting the engine Hints

Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.

Unattended vehicle Do not leave the vehicle unattended with

the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, set the parking brake and place the trans mission in selector lever position P or neutral to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Repeated starting in quick succession Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to

start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a risk of overheating and damage to the cata lytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds.

Diesel engine If the engine is cold and temperatures are be low approx. 32 /0 , the start process may be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre heating. A Check Control message is displayed.

Automatic transmission

Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu

tral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en gine starts.

Seite 64

Controls Driving

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Engine stop Hints

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot start the engine.

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

Before driving into a car wash In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, pay attention to the information re garding Washing in automatic car washes, re fer to page 223.

Automatic transmission

Switching off the engine 1. Engage transmission position P with the

vehicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake.

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off. Certain vehicle components may experience additional wear as a result of this system.

Automatic mode The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af ter each engine start. This function is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stop The engine is switched off automatically dur ing a stop under the following conditions: Manual transmission: Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is

not pressed. The driver’s seat belt is buckled or the driv

er’s door is closed. Automatic transmission: The selector lever is in transmission posi

tion D. Brake pedal remains depressed while the

vehicle is stopped. The driver’s seat belt is buckled or the driv

er’s door is closed. The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Seite 65

Driving Controls

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Displays in the instrument cluster The READY display in the tach ometer signals that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en gine stop have not been satis fied.

Note The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: External temperature too low. The external temperature is high and auto

matic climate control is running. The passenger compartment has not yet

been heated or cooled to the required level.

The engine is not yet at operating temper ature.

The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.

After driving in reverse. Fogging of the windows when the auto

matic climate control is switched on. Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. The engine compartment lid is unlocked. The parking assistant is activated. Stop-and-go traffic. The transmission selector lever is in posi

tion N or M/S. Use of fuel with high ethanol content.

Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol lowing conditions: Manual transmission:

The clutch pedal is pressed.

Automatic transmission: By releasing the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled and

the driver’s door is open. The hood was unlocked. Some indicator lamps light up for varying lengths of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/ Stop button.

Note Even if driving away was not intended, the de activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations: Excessive warming of the passenger com

partment when the cooling function is switched on.

The steering wheel is turned. Automatic transmission: the transmission

position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S. Automatic transmission: the transmission

position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/S.

The vehicle begins rolling. Fogging of the windows when the auto

matic climate control is switched on. Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. Excessive cooling of the passenger com

partment when the heating is switched on. Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc

cur, for example, if the brake pedal is de pressed a number of times in succession.

Seite 66

Controls Driving

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Activating/deactivating the system manually

Using the button

Press the button.

LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e.g., when leaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. Transmission position P is engaged auto matically.

2. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea sons, such as when the driver is detected to be absent.

Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches of the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brake Applying The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

Hints Use while driving If on a rare occasion it is necessary to

use the parking brake while driving, do not use excessive force when applying it. When using it, keep the button on the lever depressed. Otherwise, using excessive force when apply ing the parking brake may cause the rear wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.

To prevent corrosion and braking control on one side only, lightly apply the parking brake

Seite 67

Driving Controls

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. The brake lamps will not light up if the parking brake is engaged.

Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal

Do not fold in the exterior mirrors Do not fold in the exterior mirror while

driving and when the turn signals/warning flashers are working, or else the additional flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon ger be in the prescribed position and will be difficult to see.

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated:

1. «Settings» 2. «Lighting» 3. «Triple turn signal»

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

High beams, headlamp flasher

High beams, arrow 1. Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

No wiper operation on dry windshield Do not use the windshield wipers if the

windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

No wiper operation with wipers folded away

Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be damaged.

Seite 68

Controls Driving

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Switching on

Press the wiper levers up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Normal wiping speed: press up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the wiper levers down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Brief wipe: press down once. To switch off normal wipe: press down

once. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor

The concept Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset. The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir ror.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever. The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip ing operation is started. If there is frost, wiper operation is not started.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.

Seite 69

Driving Controls

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

Clean the windshield, headlamps

Pull the wiper lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu lar intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the

wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind shield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; other wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers

move to their resting position and are ready for operation.

Washer fluid General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause

injury if it is used incorrectly. Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni tion. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con

Seite 70

Controls Driving

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

tainer. Use BMWs Windshield Washer Con centrate or the equivalent.

Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con centrate and tap water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac turer’s recommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system. Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can result in clogging of the windshield washer nozzles. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Manual transmission Shifting

Shifting into 5th or 6th gear When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance move the selector lever in a dynamic movement to the left and engage the reverse gear.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are available.

R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll. When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 63, position P is engaged automatically.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: After the engine is switched off when the

vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to page 64, or when the ignition is switched

Seite 71

Driving Controls

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

off, refer to page 63, and when position R or D is engaged.

With the ignition is off, if position N is en gaged.

If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver’s door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi tion P of the automatic transmission is en gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Engaging the transmission position Transmission position P can only be disen

gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed.

With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

Depress the brake until you start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Press unlock button, in order to: Engage R. Shift out of P.

Engaging P

Press button P.

Seite 72

Controls Driving

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Sport program and manual mode

Activating the sport program

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. The sport program of the transmission is acti vated.

Activating the M/S manual mode 1. Push the selector lever to the left out of

transmission position D. 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster, e.g., M1. Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

Switching to manual mode To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward. To shift up: pull the selector lever rear

wards. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos sible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Sport automatic transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis sions, automatic shift operations are not per formed, at maximum engine speed for exam ple, if one of the following conditions is met: DSC deactivated. TRACTION activated. SPORT+ activated. In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.

Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys tem switches back into automatic mode if the selector lever is in transmission position D. Shift up: pull right shift paddle. Shift down: pull left shift paddle.

Seite 73

Driving Controls

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos sible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis played, e.g.: P.

Sport automatic transmission: Launch Control

The concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction.

Hints Component wear Do not use Launch Control too often;

otherwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.

Did not use Launch Control during the break- in, refer to page 166, period. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Requirements Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km. To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel.

Start with launch control While the engine is running:

1. Press button or select with the Driving Dynamics Control Sport+.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.

2. Engaging the transmission position S 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on

the brake. 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal

beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the trans mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again.

Seite 74

Controls Driving

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Displays Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Instrument cluster Overview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge80 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps78 4 Tachometer80

5 Engine oil temperature80 6 Current fuel consumption82 7 Electronic displays77 8 Display/reset miles81

Seite 75

Displays Controls

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features

1 Fuel gauge80 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps78 4 Tachometer80

5 Engine oil temperature80 6 Current fuel consumption82 7 Electronic displays77 8 Display/reset miles81

Seite 76

Controls Displays

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Electronic displays Overview, instrument cluster

1 Messages, e.g. Check Control78 Time81 Date81 External temperature81 Selection lists85 Service requirements82

Miles/trip miles81 Computer86

2 Transmission display74 Gear shift indicator83

3 Status, Driving Dynamics Control118

Seite 77

Displays Controls

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features

1 Time81 External temperature81 Date81 Selection list, e.g., radio85 Speed limit detection83 Computer86 Miles/trip miles81

Navigation display, see user’s manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi cation.

2 Energy recovery82 Transmission display74 Current fuel consumption82 ECO PRO173

3 Messages, e.g. Check Control78 Service requirements82

Check Control The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lamps The indicator and warning lamps in the instru ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi nations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Seite 78

Controls Displays

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Symbol Function or system

Turn signal.

Front fog lamps.

High beams.

High-beam Assistant.

Parking lamps, headlamp control.

Active Cruise Control.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control: collision warning.

Pedestrian warning.

Speed limit, adjustable.

Cruise control.

Lane departure warning.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac tion Control is activated.

Tire Pressure Monitor. Flat Tire Monitor.

Symbol Function or system

Safety belts.

Airbag system.

Steering system.

Engine functions.

Parking brake. Brake system.

In Canadian models Parking brake. Brake system.

ABS Antilock Brake System.

ABS Antilock Brake System in Canadian models.

At least one Check Control mes sage is displayed or is stored (sym bol in display).

Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. The supplementary text of urgent messages is automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Seite 79

Displays Controls

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Symbols Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. «Owner’s Manual»

Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner’s Manual.

«Service request» Contact your service center.

«Roadside Assistance» Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages are dis played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes sages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis played again automatically.

Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status»

3. «Check Control» 4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion Special messages that are displayed during driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. US models: the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler

flap is on. Hints on refueling, refer to page 180.

Tachometer Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature Cold engine: the pointer is at

the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.

Normal operating tempera ture: the pointer is in the middle or in the left half of the temperature display.

Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of the temperature range. A Check Control message is also displayed.

Seite 80

Controls Displays

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Coolant temperature If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. Check the coolant level, refer to page 203.

Odometer and trip odometer Odometer, arrow 1. Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Show/reset kilometers Press the knob. When the ignition is

switched off, the time, the external temperature and the odometer are displayed.

When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

External temperature External temperature warning

If the indicator drops to +37 /+3 or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Ice on roads Even at temperatures above

+37 /+3 , there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in creased risk of an accident.

Time The time is displayed at the bot tom of the instrument cluster. Setting the time and time for mat, refer to page 88.

Date The date is displayed in the computer. Setting the date and date for mat, refer to page 88.

Range After the reserve range is reached: A Check Control message is

displayed briefly. The remaining range is

shown on the onboard com puter.

When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when cornering quickly, operation of the engine is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continu ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.

Displaying the cruising range 1. «Settings» 2. «Info display» 3. «Additional indicators» The range is displayed in the instrument clus ter.

Seite 81

Displays Controls

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Current fuel consumption Instrument cluster

Displays the current fuel con sumption. You can check whether you are currently driv ing in an efficient and environ mentally-friendly manner.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features

Displays the current fuel con sumption. You can check whether you are currently driv ing in an efficient and environ mentally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuel consumption 1. «Settings» 2. «Info display» 3. «Additional indicators» The bar display for the current fuel consump tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Energy recovery The energy of motion of the ve hicle is converted to electrical energy while coasting. The vehi cle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be re

duced.

Service requirements The concept The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in the instrument cluster after the ignition is switched on.

The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist.

Display Data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center before a service due date.

Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. «Service required»

Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re quired.

The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has al ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections.

Seite 82

Controls Displays

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. «Service required» 4. » Vehicle inspection» 5. «Date:» 6. Adjust the settings. 7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center before a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. Open «Options». 4. «Last Service Request»

Gear shift indicator The concept The system recommends the most fuel effi cient gear for the current driving situation. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and the country-specific version of the vehicle, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the automatic transmission and in the manual transmission. Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the engaged gear is displayed.

Manual transmission: displays

Symbol Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift up to fuel efficient gear.

Shift down to fuel efficient gear.

Shift into neutral.

Automatic transmission: displays

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Speed limit detection with No Passing Information The concept

Speed limit detection Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected and compared with vehicle interior data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis played depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information stored in

Seite 83

Displays Controls

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

the navigation system and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.

No Passing Information No Passing Information in the instrument clus ter displays the beginnings and ends of no passing zones detected by the camera. The system accounts for only the beginnings and ends of No Passing zones marked by signs. No display is shown: In countries where No Passing zones are

primarily identified with road markings. On routes without signage. Where there are railroad crossings, high

way markings or other situations where no signage is present, but passing would not be permitted.

Hints Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system assists the driver and does not re place the human eye.

At a glance

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off 1. «Settings» 2. «Info display» 3. «Speed limit information» If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instru ment cluster via the onboard computer. No Passing Information is displayed together with the activated speed limit information.

Display The following is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Speed limit detection Current speed limit.

Speed limit detection is not available.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

No Passing Information Start of No Passing zone. End of No Passing zone. No Passing Information not

available.

No Passing Information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol lowing situations: In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

Seite 84

Controls Displays

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

When signs are concealed by objects. When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you. When driving toward bright lights. When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered by a sticker, etc.

In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect.

In areas not covered by the navigation sys tem.

When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in the road net work.

When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.

If the traffic signs are non-conforming. During calibration of the camera immedi

ately after vehicle shipment.

Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept The following can be displayed or operated us ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel and the display in the instru ment cluster: Current audio source. Redial on telephone. Activation of the voice activation system. In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics Control are displayed.

Display

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster with enhanced features

Activating a list and creating the setting

On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb wheel.

Seite 85

Displays Controls

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Computer Indication in the info display

The information from the on board computer is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster.

Calling up information on the info display

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information on the info display: Range. Average fuel consumption. Current fuel consumption. Average speed. Date. Speed limit detection. Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Arrow view of navigation system. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis play is inactive.

ECO PRO bonus range.

Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the on board computer is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

1. «Settings» 2. «Info display» 3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.

Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the onboard computer.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped do not enter into the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Seite 86

Controls Displays

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Distance to destination The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi gation system before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted au tomatically.

Time of arrival The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en tered in the navigation system before the trip is started. The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detection Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 83, function.

Speed limit Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. «Settings» 2. «Speed» 3. «Warning at:» 4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is

displayed. 5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. «Settings» 2. «Speed» 3. «Warning» 4. Press the controller.

Setting your current speed as the limit 1. «Settings» 2. «Speed» 3. «Select current speed» 4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.

Trip computer The vehicle features two types of computer. «Onboard info»: the values can be reset as

often as necessary. «Trip computer»: the values provide an

overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer 1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Trip computer» 3. «Reset»: all values are reset.

«Automatically reset»: all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Display on the Control Display Display the onboard computer or trip computer on the Control Display.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Onboard info» or «Trip computer»

Resetting the fuel consumption or speed 1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Onboard info» 3. «Consumpt.» or «Speed» 4. «Yes»

Sport displays In the Control Display, the current values for power and torque can be displayed.

Seite 87

Displays Controls

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Displaying sport displays in the Control Display 1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Sport displays»

Settings on the Control Display Time

Setting the time zone 1. «Settings» 2. «Time/Date» 3. «Time zone» 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored.

Setting the time 1. «Settings» 2. «Time/Date» 3. «Time:» 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours

are displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi

nutes are displayed. 7. Press the controller. The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. «Settings» 2. «Time/Date» 3. «Format:» 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored.

Date

Setting the date 1. «Settings» 2. «Time/Date» 3. «Date:» 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year. The date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. «Settings» 2. «Time/Date» 3. «Format:» 4. Select the desired format. The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display:

1. «Settings» 2. «Language/Units» 3. «Language:» 4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 27.

Seite 88

Controls Displays

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Units of measure

Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature:

1. «Settings» 2. «Language/Units» 3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness

Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. «Settings» 2. «Control display» 3. «Brightness» 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright

ness is set. 5. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness control may not be clearly visible.

Assist system information

Display on the Control Display Information on the Assist system can be dis played by activating Assist on the Control Dis play.

1. «Settings» 2. «Control display» 3. «Driver assistance info»

Head-up Display The concept

This system projects important information into the driver’s field of vision, e.g., the speed. The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following factors: Certain sitting positions. Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis

play. Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Wet roads. Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, check the basic set tings.

Switching on/off 1. «Settings» 2. «Head-Up Display» 3. «Head-Up Display»

Display

Overview Speed. Navigation system. Check Control messages. Collision warning.

Seite 89

Displays Controls

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Speed limit detection. Cruise control. Pedestrian warning. Selection list from the instrument cluster. Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. «Settings» 2. «Head-Up Display» 3. «Displayed information» 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. «Settings» 2. «Head-Up Display» 3. «Brightness» 4. Turn the controller. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad ditionally influenced using the instrument light ing. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Adjusting the height 1. «Settings» 2. «Head-Up Display» 3. «Height» 4. Turn the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the rotation 1. «Settings» 2. «Head-Up Display» 3. «Rotation» 4. Turn the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double im ages from being displayed. Therefore, have the special windshield re placed by a service center only.

Seite 90

Controls Displays

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Lamps Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance

1 Rear fog lamps 2 Front fog lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive

Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel come lamps, Daytime running lights

4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam

Assistant 7 Instrument lighting

Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control General information Switch position: 0, ,

If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati cally switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods; otherwise, the vehicle battery may be come discharged and it would then be impos sible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 92.

Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lamps When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in position or : parking and interior lamps come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked depending on the ambient light.

Activating/deactivating 1. «Settings» 2. «Lighting» 3. «Welcome lights» The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni tion is switched off.

Setting the duration 1. «Settings» 2. «Lighting»

Seite 91

Lamps Controls

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

3. «Pathway lighting:» 4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Automatic headlamp control Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on.

Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.

Daytime running lights With the ignition switched on, the daytime run ning lights light up in position 0, or . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position .

Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac tivate the daytime running lights.

1. «Settings» 2. «Lighting» 3. «Daytime running lamps» The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Roadside parking lamps

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, one of the two front fog lamps is switched on as a corneringlamp. As a result the inside of the curve is better lighted.

Activating Switch position with the ignition switched on. The cornering lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals.

Seite 92

Controls Lamps

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv er’s side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, only the cornering lamp is active.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High-beam Assistant The concept When the low beams are switched on, this sys tem automatically switches the high beams on and off or suppresses the light in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traf fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating

The High-beam Assistant can be activated when the low beams are switched on.

1. Turn the light switch to or . 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever,

arrow.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are au tomatically brightened or dimmed. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

The blue indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. Depend

ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for oncom ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, the blue indicator light will stay on.

Switching the high beams on and off manually

High beams on, arrow 1. High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but ton on the turn signal lever.

System limits Personal responsibility The high-beam assistant cannot serve as

a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situa tions where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

Seite 93

Lamps Controls

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation. In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on coming traffic on freeways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.

At low speeds. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Fog lamps Front fog lamps The low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 92, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps.

Instrument lighting Adjusting

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.

Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati cally. The brightness of some of these lamps is influ enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.

1 Interior lamps 2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lamps on and off

Press the button.

Seite 94

Controls Lamps

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button.

Reading lamps Press the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps. When the interior lamps are switched off per manently, the reading lamps cannot be switched on.

Ambient light Depending on the equipment, the lighting can be adjusted in the interior for some lights.

Selecting color scheme 1. «Settings» 2. «Lighting» 3. «Ambient:» 4. Select the desired setting. If the color scheme of the line is selected and the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome lamps are displayed in the color of the line when the vehicle is unlocked.

Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.

1. «Settings» 2. «Lighting» 3. «Brightness:» 4. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 95

Lamps Controls

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Safety Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 2 Front airbag, front passenger 3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag 5 Knee airbags

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint.

Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Seite 96

Controls Safety

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags

Keep at a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o’clock and 9 o’clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig gered.

There should be no people, animals, or ob jects between an airbag and a person.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navi gation instruments and mobile phones.

Make sure that the front passenger is sit ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.

Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Do not remove the steering wheel. Do not apply adhesive materials to the air

bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.

Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.

Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo sives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

When the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates

the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning Warning lamp does not come on when the

ignition is turned on. The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Seite 97

Safety Controls

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately

When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in the event of an accident despite corresponding severity of the accident.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body. The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly.

Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger

keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front pas senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in structions under Children on the front passen ger seat.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deacti vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not acti vated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.

Seite 98

Controls Safety

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver’s and front passenger airbag The strength with which the driver’s and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver’s and front passenger seats. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Con trol Display.

Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Control Display.

1. Move the respective seat forward all the way.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap pears. If the message continues to be displayed, re peat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a re peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The system monitors tire pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure.

Hints Tire damage due to external factors Sudden tire damage caused by external

influences cannot be indicated in advance.

Pay attention to the other information and indi cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 187, as well when using the system.

Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en sured. Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly.

Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. «Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)» The status is displayed.

Status display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display.

Seite 99

Safety Controls

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning rela tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires.

Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: The system is being reset. Malfunction.

Carry out reset Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. «Perform reset» 4. Start the engine — do not drive away. 5. Carry out the reset with «Perform reset». 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the tire inflation pressures set are accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically during driving. After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and «Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active» is displayed.

The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the reset resumes automati cally.

Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure. No reset was performed for the system.

The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. Then perform the reset.

Seite 100

Controls Safety

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec tronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if necessary.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the

trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Required inflation pressure check message A Check Control message is displayed. Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out a reset of the system. In some cases, a wheel was changed without having carried out a reset.

System limits The system does not function properly if a re set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported even though the tire inflation pres sures are correct. The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g., due to driving or because of the heat of the Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also. The tire pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. This behavior may cause a warning to be issued if temperatures fall very sharply.

Seite 101

Safety Controls

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat

tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.

Display in the following situations: A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if neces sary.

Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.

TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.

Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system auto matically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi cator to indicate when the system is not oper ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi nated. This sequence will continue upon sub sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system detects a pressure loss on the ba sis of speed differences between the individual wheels while driving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire. The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en

Seite 102

Controls Safety

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

sured. Initialize the system after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. «Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)» The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. «Perform reset» 4. Start the engine — do not drive away. 5. Start the initialization with «Perform reset». 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire

inflation pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface. Sporty driving style: slip in the drive

wheels, high lateral acceleration. When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Seite 103

Safety Controls

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Intelligent Safety The concept Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In telligent Safety consists of one or more of the following systems, which can help to avoid an imminent collision. These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button: Collision warning, refer to page 105. Pedestrian warning, refer to page 110.

Note Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi

tute for the driver’s personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi cle’s surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.

Seite 104

Controls Safety

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off The Intelligent Safety systems are automati cally active after each engine start via the start/ stop button.

Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out.

Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up.

Settings can be made on the Control Display.

Collision warning Depending on how the equipment is equipped, the collision warning system consists of one of the two systems: Collision warning with City Braking func

tion, refer to page 105; Collision warning with braking function, re

fer to page 108

Collision warning with City Braking function The concept The system can help to prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system helps to reduce the collision speed. The system issues a warning if there is immi nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde pendently. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.

General information The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation. Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter vention occurs when appropriate.

Seite 105

Safety Controls

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Detection range

Vehicles are observed when they are traveling in the same direction of movement if they are located within the detection range of the sys tem.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but ton.

Switching off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

Press the button. The LED goes out.

Switch the system back on: press the button again.

Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via iDrive.

1. «Settings» 2. «Frontal Coll. Warning» 3. Activate the desired warning time on the

Control Display. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Note Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Display If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

Seite 106

Controls Safety

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn ing. Increase braking and distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma neuver.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself to in tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can as sist with a slight braking intervention. The in tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop. Manual transmission: During a braking inter vention up until reaching a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

Tow-starting and towing When tow-starting and towing the vehi

cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.

System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan ger of an accident occurring.

Detection range The system’s detection capabilities are limited. This may result in the warning not being is sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you or sharply decelerating vehicles. Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Pedestrians.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow

fall. In tight curves. If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF.

If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen sor is dirty or obscured.

During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment.

If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky.

Seite 107

Safety Controls

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings.

Collision warning with braking function The concept The system issues a warning if there is immi nent danger of a collision and also includes a braking function. If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in conjunction with a camera. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.

General information The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation.

Detection range

It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar system.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but ton.

Switching off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

Press the button. The LED goes out.

Seite 108

Controls Safety

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Switch the system back on: press the button again.

Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via iDrive.

1. «Settings» 2. «Frontal Coll. Warning» 3. Activate the desired warning time on the

Control Display. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Display

Warning stages

Prewarning This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. The acute warning prompts the driver to inter vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is accompanied by a braking intervention. The braking intervention is executed with lim ited braking force and for a brief period only. The intervention can bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated. Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. No automatic delay occurs.

Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

Tow-starting and towing When tow-starting and towing the vehi

cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.

Display in the instrument cluster The collision warning can be issued in the in strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and acoustically.

Warning stages

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn ing. Increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma neuver.

Adapting your speed and driving style The display does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Seite 109

Safety Controls

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan ger of an accident occurring.

Detection range The system’s detection capabilities are limited. This may result in the warning not being is sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you or sharply decelerating vehicles. Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Pedestrians.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow

fall. In tight curves. If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF.

If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen sor is dirty or obscured.

During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment.

If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky.

Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings.

Pedestrian warning with city braking function The concept The system can help to prevent accidents with pedestrians. The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function. The system is controlled via the camera in the base of the interior mirror.

General information The system issues a warning with brightness staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and assists with a brake intervention shortly before a collision. It responds to persons that are within the de tection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div ided into two areas. Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle. Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.

Seite 110

Controls Safety

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo cated within the central area. A warning is is sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but ton.

Switching off Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out.

Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up.

Warning with braking function

Note Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a sig nal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or

making an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself to in tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can as sist with a slight braking intervention. The in tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop. Manual transmission: During a braking inter vention up until reaching a complete stop, the engine may be shut down. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated.

Seite 111

Safety Controls

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

Tow-starting and towing When tow-starting and towing the vehi

cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.

System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan ger of an accident occurring.

Detection range The detection capability of the camera is lim ited. This may result in the warning not being is sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Partially covered pedestrians. Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of the viewing angle or contour. Pedestrians outside of the detection range. Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow

fall. In tight curves. If the camera view field or the front wind

shield are dirty or covered. When driving toward bright lights.

Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en gine, via the Start/Stop knob.

During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment.

When it is dark outside.

Lane departure warning The concept Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. This speed, depending on the country version, is between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. When switching on the system below this speed, a message is displayed in the instru ment cluster. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit uation. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Notes Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi cle.

Seite 112

Controls Safety

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Lane departure warning

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display in the instrument cluster Lines: system is activated.

Arrows: at least one lane marking was de tected and warnings can be issued.

Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning The warning ends: Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. When returning to your own lane. When braking hard. When using the turn signal.

System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg

ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.

When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.

In tight curves or on narrow lanes. When the lane markings are covered by

objects. When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you. When driving toward bright lights. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment.

Seite 113

Safety Controls

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Active Blind Spot Detection The concept

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehi cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly.

Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit uations described above. The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.

Notes Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi

tute for the driver’s personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi cle’s surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Active Blind Spot Detection

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper.

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Seite 114

Controls Safety

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Display

Information stage The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.

Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone.

System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In tight curves or on narrow lanes. If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered

with stickers. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID:

NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful inter

ference, and this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

Brake force display The concept

During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.

During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.

Seite 115

Safety Controls

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. This then reduces braking dis tance to a minimum during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub

ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.

Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC Press and hold the button, but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSC Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Seite 116

Controls Driving stability control systems

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Indicator/warning lamps When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward mo mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim ited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads. When rocking the vehicle or driving off in

deep snow or on loose surfaces. When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Activating DTC Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica

tor lamp go out.

Above 31 mph/50 km/h DTC is automatically deactivated.

xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface.

Dynamic Damping Control The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav eling on uneven road surfaces. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style.

Programs The system offers several different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 118.

SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock ab sorbers for greater driving agility.

SPORT+ Consistently sporty control of the shock ab sorbers for greater driving agility when driving with limited driving stabilization.

Seite 117

Driving stability control systems Controls

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced control of the vehicle.

Variable sport steering The variable sport steering increases the steering angle of the front wheels at large steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or when parking. Steering becomes more direct. It also varies the force required to turn the wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. This results in a sporty steering response. In addition, it becomes easier to steer during parking and maneuvering.

Driving Dynamics Control The concept The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle. Various programs can be selected for this pur pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate a program.

Operating the programs

Press the button Program

DSC OFF TRACTION

SPORT+ SPORT COMFORT ECO PRO

Automatic program change The system automatically switches to COM FORT in the following situations: Failure of DSC Dynamic Damping Control. The vehicle has a flat tire.

When activating cruise control in TRAC TION or DSC OFF mode.

DSC OFF When DSC OFF, refer to page 116, is active, driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

TRACTION When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 117, is activated. Driving stability is limited during ac celeration and when driving in bends.

SPORT+ Sporty driving with optimized chassis and adapted engine control with limited driving sta bilization. Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks.

Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the instrument

cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

Automatic program change When activating cruise control, the program automatically switches to SPORT mode.

Indicator/warning lamps SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization.

Seite 118

Controls Driving stability control systems

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Activating SPORT Press button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control Display, refer to page 119, the SPORT driving mode can be set to individual specifications. Activating SPORT. «Configure SPORT» Configuring the SPORT driving mode. SPORT can also be configured before it is acti vated:

1. «Settings» 2. «Driving mode» 3. «Configure SPORT» 4. Configure driving mode. This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT driving mode is activated.

COMFORT For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization.

Activating COMFORT Press button repeatedly until COM FORT is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 118.

ECO PRO ECO PRO, refer to page 173, provides consis tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving stabili zation.

Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. The program can be configured to individual specifications.

Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. «Configure ECO PRO» Make the desired settings.

Configuring drive program Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode: SPORT, refer to page 119. ECO PRO, refer to page 174.

Displays

Program selection Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs.

Selected program The selected program is dis played in the instrument cluster.

Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed on the Control Display.

1. «Settings»

Seite 119

Driving stability control systems Controls

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

2. «Driving mode» 3. «Driving mode info»

Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradi ents. The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.

Seite 120

Controls Driving stability control systems

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Driving comfort Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC The concept This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati cally on clear roads. To the extent possible, the system automati cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au tomatically reduces the speed, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi cle ahead begins moving faster. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly. Even if some time passes before the vehicle ahead of you drives away again, your own vehi cle can still be accelerated automatically and simply. As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed.

The speed is also maintained on downhill gra dients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient.

General information Depending on the set driving program, the characteristics of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not release

the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process, especially for lane tracking, adaptation of speed, distance and driving style to the traffic conditions. Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations. Monitor the driving process, the surrounding area and what is occurring in traffic continu ously and attentively and actively intervene as required, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver.

Unfavorable weather conditions In the event of unfavorable weather and

light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of vehicles and lane limits as well as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already detected. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.

Seite 121

Driving comfort Controls

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press the button

Function

System on/off, interrupt, refer to page 122

Maintaining/storing the speed, refer to page 123

Resume speed, refer to page 124

Reduce distance, refer to page 124

Increase distance, refer to page 124

Rocker switch: Maintaining/storing the speed, refer to page 123 Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed, refer to page 123

The arrangement of the buttons varies accord ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun try-specific variants.

Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de tection of vehicles.

If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re move layers of snow and ice carefully.

Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.

The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.

Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter

rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc curring.

If switching off the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Press the button.

If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once.

Seite 122

Controls Driving comfort

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted.

Interrupting When active, press the button.

If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: When the brakes are applied. When transmission position D is disen

gaged. When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is

activated or DSC is deactivated. When DSC is actively controlling stability. When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control. If the safety belt and the driver’s door are

opened when the vehicle is standing still. If the system has not detected objects for

an extended period, e.g., on a road with very little traffic without road edge line markings.

If the detection range of the radar is dis rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.

Maintaining/storing the speed Press the button.

Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 125. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted to maintain and store the current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc curring.

Speed differences Large differences in speed relative to ve

hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen sated by the system for example in the follow ing situations: When catching up rapidly with a truck. When another vehicle suddenly swerves

into the wrong lane.

Seite 123

Driving comfort Controls

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.

Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf

fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.

Reduce distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 125, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Increase distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 125, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Calling up the desired speed and distance

While driving Press the button with the system switched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When the system is switched off. When the ignition is switched off.

While standing Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against rolling

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and apply the parking brake. Other wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill. Green marking in the speedometer:

Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra dar sensor moves off.

Marking in the speedometer turns orange: no automatic driving away. To accelerate to the desired speed auto matically, press the accelerator or press the RES or SET button.

Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection range has moved off. Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle:

1. Press the button to call up a stored desired speed.

Seite 124

Controls Driving comfort

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press

the RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed The marking lights up green:

the system is active. The marking lights up or

ange: the system has been interrupted.

The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

Brief status display Selected desired speed.

If — appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys tem requirements for operation are currently not met.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on.

Distance display

The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.

Indicator/warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not

relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for operating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by

braking or making an evasive maneuver.

System limits

Speed range Best results are achieved when using the sys tem on well-developed roads and highways. The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Seite 125

Driving comfort Controls

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle. The system can also be activated when sta tionary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected.

Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca

pacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can in tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Deceleration The system does not decelerate when a sta tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic congestion. The system also does not respond to: Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road

users. Red traffic lights. Stationary objects. Cross traffic. Oncoming traffic.

No warnings A warning may not be issued when ap

proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis tance. This also applies to major speed differ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu vers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Seite 126

Controls Driving comfort

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Unexpected lane change

If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehi cle, you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles.

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a consider able delay.

When approaching a curve, the system may react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed.

Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or behind bumps in the road.

Radar sensor

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID: OAYARS3-A Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful inter

ference, and this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

Seite 127

Driving comfort Controls

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails.

Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient.

Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable

conditions make it impossible to drive at a con stant speed, for instance: On curvy roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi cle and cause an accident.

General information Depending on the set driving program, the characteristics of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press the button Function

System on/off, interrupt

Store speed

Resume speed

Rocker switch: change, hold, store speed

Controls

Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.

Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter

rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Press the button.

If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:

Seite 128

Controls Driving comfort

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The brakes are applied. The clutch pedal is depressed for a few

seconds or released while a gear is not en gaged.

The gear engaged is too high for the cur rent speed.

The transmission position D is disengaged. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated. DSC is actively controlling stability. When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.

Maintaining/storing the current speed Press the button.

Or

Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 130. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Changing/maintaining speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted in order to maintain and store the current speed.

Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc curring.

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set de pends on the vehicle.

Pressing the rocker switch to the resist ance point and holding it accelerates or de celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed Press the button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Seite 129

Driving comfort Controls

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator lamp Depending on how the vehicle is equip ped, the indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster indicates whether the sys

tem is switched on.

Desired speed The marking lights up green:

the system is active. The marking lights up or

ange: the system has been interrupted.

The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

Brief status display Selected desired speed.

If — appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys tem requirements for operation are currently not met.

PDC Park Distance Control The concept PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or be hind your vehicle are indicated with: Signal tones. Visual display.

General information Measurements are made by ultrasound sen sors in the bumpers. The range, depending on the environment, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given:

By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.

By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

To ensure full operability: Do not cover sensors, e.g., by stickers, bi

cycle racks and the like. Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process. Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations. Continuously and attentively monitor the driv ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle and the traffic situation, and actively intervene when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an accident.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning.

Seite 130

Controls Driving comfort

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the rearview camera, refer to page 133, can be switched on.

Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on:

«Rear view camera» The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display

Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is de tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object be comes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and be hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig nal is sounded. The signal tone is switched off: When the vehicle moves away from an ob

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. When transmission position P is engaged.

Volume The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted, refer to user’s manual for Navigation, Enter tainment, Communication. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors red, green and yellow. If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:

1. «Rear view camera» Select the symbol on the Control Display.

Seite 131

Driving comfort Controls

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

2. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances: For small children and animals. For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats. If there is an external disturbance of the ul

trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.

When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam aged.

Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer hitches of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With moving objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences. For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain.

When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice.

When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. On uneven surfaces, such as speed

bumps. In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga rages.

In heavy exhaust. Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. The malfunction is signaled by a continu ous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no lon ger present, the system is again fully func tional.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Surround View The concept Surround View comprises various camera as sistance systems that help the driver when parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections. Rearview camera, refer to page 133 Side View, refer to page 135. Top View, refer to page 136.

Seite 132

Controls Driving comfort

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Rearview camera The concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects lo cated outside the picture area of the backup camera.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Rearview camera

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 226.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The rearview camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on:

«Rear view camera»

Seite 133

Driving comfort Controls

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement The rearview camera is switched on. The trunk lid is fully closed.

Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac tive at the same time. Parking aid lines

«Parking aid lines» Pathway and turning circle lines are dis played.

Obstacle marking «Obstacle marking»

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

Can be shown in the rearview camera im age when in drive mode R.

Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Are dependent on the current steering an gle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

Can be shown in the rearview camera im age.

Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road.

Only one turning circle line is displayed af ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer tain angle.

Obstacle marking

General information

Marks for detected obstacles can be shown in the rearview camera image. Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown.

Seite 134

Controls Driving comfort

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Parking using pathway and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir

cle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Display settings

Brightness With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

System limits

Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC. Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to page 130. The objects displayed in the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

Side View The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela tively late from the driver’s seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi cle record the traffic situation on each side.

Notes The images from both cameras are shown si multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out side the picture area of the Side View cam eras.

Seite 135

Driving comfort Controls

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Side View

Cameras

Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap ture the image. The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 226.

Switching on/off

Switching on/off manually Press the button.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if necessary.

Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.

Brightness With the Side View switched on:

1. «Brightness» 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast With the Side View switched on:

1. «Contrast» 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

System limits The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m.

Top View The concept Top View provides assistance in parking and maneuvering. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose.

Seite 136

Controls Driving comfort

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

General information The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera. The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early.

Notes Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects lo cated outside the picture area of the cameras.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Top View

Cameras

The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 226.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically Select drive mode R with the engine running. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. Top View is displayed.

Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With Top View switched on:

«Rear view camera»

Seite 137

Driving comfort Controls

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The backup camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display.

The display appears as soon as Top View is activated.

If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display when reverse gear is selected. To switch to Top View:

«Rear view camera» Select the symbol on the Control Display. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast With Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines The static, red turning circle line shows the

space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way.

The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space ac tually needed to the side of the vehicle. The lane line depends on the engaged drive mode and the current steering angle. The track line is continuously adjusted for the steering wheel movement.

«Parking aid lines» Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit uations: With a door open. With the trunk lid open. With an exterior mirror folded in. In poor light. A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations.

Parking assistant The concept

This system assists the driver in parking paral lel to the road.

Seite 138

Controls Driving comfort

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best pos sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear view camera and react accordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 130.

Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process. Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations. Continuously and attentively monitor the driv ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle and the traffic situation, and actively intervene when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an accident.

Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was

measured are not taken into account by the system. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci dent occurring.

Transporting loads Loads that extend beyond the perimeter

of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci dent occurring.

Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi

cle over or onto curbs. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi cle may become damaged.

An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward ap

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Maximum distance to row of parked vehi

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle’s

length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking procedure Doors and trunk lid closed. Parking brake released. When parking in parking spaces on the

driver’s side, the corresponding turn signal must be set where applicable.

Seite 139

Driving comfort Controls

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel arches. To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Switching on/off

Switching on with the button Press the button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with the reverse gear Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Activate: «Parking Assistant» Select the symbol in the Control Display.

Switching off The system can be deactivated as follows: Press the button.

Switch off the ignition.

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Status display Depending on the appointment version, differ ent views of the status display are shown and are described below as View 1, refer to page 140, or View 2, refer to page 141.

Status of the system, Display 1

The status is displayed with symbols.

Seite 140

Controls Driving comfort

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Gray: parking space search. Blue: the system is activated. A suitable parking space was found.

The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been seized.

Status of the parking space search

Gray, arrow 1: parking space search. Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.

The vehicle is parked in the parking space if the parking procedure is active.

No display: no parking space search.

Status of the system, Display 2

Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle representation. Parking as sistant is activated and search for parking space active.

Suitable parking spaces are displayed next to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the

road as on the Control Display. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

The parking procedure is ac tive. Steering control has been seized.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forwards slow and straight, even if the system is de activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well Loud sounds outside and within the vehi

cle can drown out the signal tones of the park ing assistant and PDC. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.

1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti vate it if necessary. The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play. To achieve the best possible parking posi tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel movement as required after the gear change when the vehicle is stationary. The end of the parking procedure is indi cated on the Control Display.

3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec essary.

Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

Seite 141

Driving comfort Controls

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

«Parking Assistant» Select the symbol on the Control Display.

Press the button.

Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if

he takes over steering. If a gear is selected that does not match

the instruction on the Control Display. If a turn signal is activated in the opposite

direction to the desired side for parking. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h. On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces

if necessary. When there are obstacles that are hard to

overcome, such as curbs. When there are obstacles that suddenly

arise. If a maximum number of parking attempts

or the time taken for parking is exceeded. A Check Control message is displayed.

Continuing An interrupted parking procedure can be con tinued if necessary. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this.

System limits

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis tance in the following situations: In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.

On slippery ground. On steep uphill or downhill grades. When leaves or snow has collected in the

parking space.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances: For small children and animals. For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats. If there is an external disturbance of the ul

trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.

When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam aged.

Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer hitches of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With moving objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences. For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 142

Controls Driving comfort

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.

Seite 143

Driving comfort Controls

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Climate control Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Automatic climate control

1 Seat heating, left52 2 Vent settings 3 Rear window defroster 4 Air flow 5 AUTO program

6 Temperature 7 Seat heating, right52 8 Cooling function 9 Recirculated-air mode 10 Interior temperature sensor

Seite 144

Controls Climate control

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distribution Turn the wheel to select the de sired program or the desired in termediate setting.

Windows. Upper body region. Windows, upper body region, and foot

well. Footwell.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation Direct the air distribution toward windows, in crease the air flow and temperature, and, if necessary, use the cooling function.

Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Air flow, manual Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The air flow of the air conditioner may be re duced automatically to save battery power.

AUTO program Press the button. Air flow, air distribution, and tempera

ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell.

The cooling function, refer to page 145, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram.

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature.

The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if neces sary by increasing the cooling or heating out put, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli mate control will not have sufficient time to ad just the set temperature.

Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified

and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 168, devel ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

Seite 145

Climate control Controls

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

LED off: outside air flows in continuously. LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply

of outside air into the vehicle is perma nently blocked.

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if nec essary.

Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead ily.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off Press the left button for the minimum speed.

Switching on Press any button except Rear window defroster. Seat heating.

Microfilter In external and recirculated air mode the mi crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 204, of your vehi cle.

Automatic climate control with enhanced features

1 Seat heating, left52 2 Temperature, left

3 AUTO program 4 Display

Seite 146

Controls Climate control

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

5 Maximum cooling 6 Temperature, right 7 Seat heating, right52 8 Cooling function 9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu

lated-air mode 10 Air distribution, right

11 Air flow, AUTO intensity 12 Air distribution, left 13 Rear window defroster 14 Interior temperature sensor always keep

clear 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden

sation

Climate control functions in detail

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature.

The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if neces sary by increasing the cooling or heating out put, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli mate control will not have sufficient time to ad just the set temperature.

AUTO program Press the button. Air flow, air distribution, and tempera

ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity program and outside influen ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 147, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, auto matic control of the air flow and air distribution can be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase the inten

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem

perature, maximum air flow and air circulation mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this. The function is available above an external temperature of approx. 32 /0 and with the engine running. The air flow can be adjusted when the program is active.

Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified

and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Seite 147

Climate control Controls

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 168, devel ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff auto matically.

Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked.

If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the wind shield.

Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead ily.

Manual air distribution Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell.

Footwell. Windows and footwell: driver’s side only. Windows, upper body region and footwell:

driver’s side only. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen sor.

Air flow, manual To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re

moved from the windshield and the front side windows.

The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen sor.

Seite 148

Controls Climate control

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Switching the system on/off

Switching off Press the left button for the minimum speed.

Switching on Press any button except Rear window defroster. Seat heating.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated air mode the mi crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 204, of your vehi cle.

Ventilation Front ventilation

Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 1.

Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 2.

Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar row 3. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer.

Adjusting the ventilation Ventilation for cooling:

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.

Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Ventilation in the rear

Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 1.

Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar row 2. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer.

Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 3.

Parked-car ventilation The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec essary. The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by us ing two preset switch-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Seite 149

Climate control Controls

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Switching on/off directly 1. «Settings» 2. «Climate» 3. «Activate comf. ventilation»

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the switch-on time 1. «Settings» 2. «Climate» 3. «Timer 1:» or «Timer 2:» 4. Set the desired time.

Activating the switch-on time 1. «Settings» 2. «Climate» 3. «Activate timer 1» or «Activate timer 2»

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti vated.

Seite 150

Controls Climate control

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Interior equipment Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Universal garage door opener The concept The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener re places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program med with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

During programming During programming and before activat

ing a device using the integrated universal re mote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is gener

ally compatible with the universal garage door opener. If you have any questions, please contact: Your service center. www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of John son Controls, Inc.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

LED, arrow 1. Buttons, arrow 2. The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re

quired for programming.

Programming

General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior

Seite 151

Interior equipment Controls

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

rearview mirror. The required distance de pends on the manual transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program med on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will be gin flashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the but ton on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance be tween the interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distan ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec onds.

6. To program other functions on other but tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the inte rior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating- code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat ing-code system. Read the system’s operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing

and continuous illumination of the LED will re peat for approximately 20 seconds. For systems with an alternating-code system, the universal garage door opener and the sys tem also have to be synchronized. Please read the operating manual of the sys tem being set up for information on how to synchronize the system. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec ond person. To synchronize:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this work step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once syn chronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror

button to be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED

starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans mitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this

Seite 152

Controls Interior equipment

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec onds.

Controls Before operation Before operating a system using the

integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote- controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rear view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig nal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compass At a glance

1 Control button 2 Mirror display

Mirror display The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight.

Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the con trol button is pressed: Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering

setting. 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi cle so that the compass operates correctly; re fer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 153

Interior equipment Controls

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the con trol button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone correspond ing to your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The com pass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: The wrong point of the compass is dis

played. The point of the compass displayed does

not change despite changing the direction of travel.

Not all points of the compass are dis played.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic

objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. 3. Press and hold the control button for ap

prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that «C» appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc cessful, the «C» is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to switch between English «E» and German «O».

Seite 154

Controls Interior equipment

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

The setting is stored automatically after ap proximately 10 seconds.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter Ashtray

Opening

Raise cover.

Emptying Take out the insert.

Lighter Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.

Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.

The lighter is located next to the ashtray.

Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Connecting electrical devices Hints

Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the

factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.

Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.

Sockets The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run ning or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

Seite 155

Interior equipment Controls

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Front center console

Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga rette lighter.

In the front passenger footwell

The socket is located below the glove com partment.

Rear center console

Remove the cover.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the left side in the cargo area.

USB interface for data transfer The concept Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: Personal Profile settings, refer to page 36. Music collection. Importing Trips.

Without Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance

The USB interface is located in the glove com partment.

Seite 156

Controls Interior equipment

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

With Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance

The USB interface is located in the center arm rest.

Notes Observe the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con

nector into the USB interface. Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface. Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Through-loading system The concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. If equipped with through-loading system: the rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 4020 40. The sides can be folded down separately or to gether.

Hints Danger of pinching Before folding down the rear seat back

rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in jury or damage may result.

Lock the rear seat backrests in position Before installation of child restraint sys

tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against the backrest and securely latch all backrests. Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be cause of unexpected movement of the rear seat backrest.

Retract the head restraint if necessary before backrest is folded down

With folding head restraints, fold in the head restraints before folding down the backrests, or damage may result.

Opening 1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety

belt in the rear using the latch plate of an other safety belt.

2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt into the specially designated fixture on the rear window shelf.

3. Push the corresponding head restraint down as far as it will go.

Seite 157

Interior equipment Controls

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to release the rear seat backrest.

5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly.

6. Fold backrest forward.

Closing 1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright

seating position and engage it. Ensure that the lock is securely en gaged

Make sure that the lock engages properly when folding back, otherwise transported cargo could enter the passenger compart ment during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants.

2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on the rear window shelf.

3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage.

To secure cargo, refer to page 170, with nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing eyes.

Folding down the middle section 1. Fold in the middle head restraint. 2. Reach into the recess and pull the middle

section forward.

Seite 158

Controls Interior equipment

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Storage compartments Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Notes No loose objects in the passenger com partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; other wise, they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance ma neuvers.

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash board

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash board.

Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail able in the vehicle interior: Glove compartment on the driver’s side,

refer to page 160. Glove compartment on the front passenger

side, refer to page 159. Without Smoker’s package: Front storage

compartment, in front of the cupholders, refer to page 160.

Storage compartment in the front center armrest, refer to page 160.

Compartments in the doors, refer to page 160.

Nets on the backrests of the front seats. Storage compartment in the rear center

console, refer to page 161.

Glove compartment Front passenger side

Note Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc cur during accidents.

Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on. The net in the glove compartment is provided for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder, refer to page 161.

Closing Fold cover closed.

Seite 159

Storage compartments Controls

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Locking The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 41, for example. This prevents access to the glove compart ment and to the cargo area. After the glove compartment is locked, the re mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key.

Driver’s side

Note Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc cur during accidents.

Opening

Pull the handle.

Closing Fold cover closed.

Front storage compartment

Raise the lid to open it.

Compartments in the doors Do not stow any breakable objects Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.

glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac cident.

Center armrest Front A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.

Opening

Fold the center armrest up.

Repositioning Center armrest can be pushed forwards or backwards. It engages in the end positions.

Seite 160

Controls Storage compartments

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Connection for an external audio device

.

Storage compartment in the rear Storage compartment is located in the rear center console.

Cupholders Hints

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con

tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.

Front

Storage tray for front cupholders The cupholder with the storage tray can be used for additional storage. To do this, place the storage tray in the cupholder. Only use the storage tray for small objects, such as keys or the remote control. When not in use, stow the storage tray in the glove compartment net. Insert the storage tray into the net so that the top surface faces up. Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray.

Rear In the center armrest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. To open: press the button. To close: push both covers back in, one after the other.

Pushing back the covers Push back the covers before folding up

the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could become damaged.

Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located in the grab han dles in the rear.

Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv er’s vision.

Seite 161

Storage compartments Controls

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma neuvers.

Storage compartments in the cargo area Storage compartment A storage compartment is located on the left side. Located on the right side is a storage compart ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 206, and first aid kit, refer to page 218.

Net Small objects can be stowed in the net on the left side.

Hooks/multi-function hook

A multi-function hook is located on each side of the cargo area. The multi-function hooks can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.

Light and suitable objects only Only hang light bags or suitable objects

from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and eva sive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.

Retaining strap A retaining strap is available on the right side trim for fastening small objects.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area To secure the cargo, refer to page 170, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Floor net The floor net can also be used to Secure the load, refer to page 170, and to store small parts.

Storage compartment under cargo floor panel

Maximum load To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/ 20 kg in the storage compartment under the cargo floor panel.

Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch at top, if necessary, arrow 2.

Partitioning the compartment The compartment can be divided using an at tachable partition.

Seite 162

Controls Storage compartments

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Seite 163

Storage compartments Controls

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Driving tips This chapter provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limit.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h. For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and

93 mph/150 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking- in period.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle’s operating life.

General driving notes Closing the trunk lid

Drive with the trunk lid closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other

wise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road users may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en ter the passenger compartment.

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Greatly increase the blower speed. Drive moderately.

Seite 166

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri ous personal injury as well as property dam age. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Diesel particulate filter The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti cles and burns them periodically at high tem peratures. During the cleaning time of several minutes, the following may occur: Temporarily, the engine may run less

smoothly. Noises and a slight amount of smoke com

ing from the exhaust until shortly after the engine is shut down.

A somewhat higher engine speed is neces sary to achieve the accustomed perform ance.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle

It is advised that you do not use mobile com munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in side the vehicle without connecting them di rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addi tion, there is no assurance that the radiation

generated during transmission will be dis charged from the vehicle interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

Driving through water Drive through calm water only and only if it is not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle’s engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces sary. The vehicle maintains steering responsive ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Seite 167

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Objects within the range of movement of the pedals

No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again after they were removed for clean ing, for example.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet coated with road salt or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres sure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi ciency. You can increase the engine’s braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary.

Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the

brake system. Light but consistent brake pres sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are un available with the engine stopped.

Brake disc corrosion The corrosion on the brake discs and the con tamination on the brake pads are furthered by: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops that exits under neath the vehicle. Traces of water under the vehicle like this are normal.

Seite 168

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Loading Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Hints Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam aged.

Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as

described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car’s occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu pants.

Determining the load limit 1. Locate the following statement on your ve

hicles placard:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Seite 169

Loading Driving tips

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo. Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi

ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo.

Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Floor net The floor net can also be used to Secure the load and to store small parts.

Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo area floor.

Securing cargo Smaller and lighter items: secure with re

taining straps or draw straps. Larger and heavy objects: secure with

cargo straps. Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Seite 170

Driving tips Loading

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as

described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car’s occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu pants.

Roof-mounted luggage rack Note Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Roof drip rail with flaps

The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. Fold the cover outward.

Loading Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Because roof racks raise the vehicle’s center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef fect on vehicle handling and steering re sponse.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Distribute the roof load uniformly. The roof load should not be too large in

area. Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom. Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie

with ratchet straps. Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the trunk lid. Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler

ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Seite 171

Loading Driving tips

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Saving fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv ing style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the envi ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby reduces the range.

Tires General information Tires can affect fuel consumption values in various ways, for instance fuel consumption can be influenced by the size of the tires.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla tion pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away immediately Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.

Seite 172

Driving tips Saving fuel

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Avoid high engine speeds Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds. When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con stant speed. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear. The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indi cates the most fuel efficient gear.

Use coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop. If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec onds of switching off the engine. Using this system can cause certain compo nents of the vehicle to become worn prema turely.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter mined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stop- and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed. The ECO PRO driving program supports the energy conserving use of comfort functions. These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely.

Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. The maintenance should be carried out by your service center. Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer to page 204.

ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate control output, are adjusted. In addition, context-sensitive instructions can be displayed that assist in driving in a manner that optimizes fuel consumption. In the instrument display, the extension of the range achieved by this can be displayed as a bonus range.

Seite 173

Saving fuel Driving tips

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

At a glance The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and displays: ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 174. ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to

page 175 ECO PRO climate control, refer to

page 174.

Activate ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO

Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. «Configure ECO PRO» 3. Configure the program.

Via the iDrive 1. «Settings» 2. «ECO PRO mode» Or

1. «Settings» 2. «Driving mode» 3. «Configure ECO PRO» Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip «Tip at:»:

Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO Tip is to be displayed.

«ECO PRO speed warning»: A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded.

ECO PRO climate control «ECO PRO climate control»

The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi cient. By making a slight change to the set tempera ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel consumption can be economized. The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior mirror heating are also reduced. The exterior mirror heating is made available when outside temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potential The percentage of potential savings that can be achieved with the current configuration is displayed.

Display in the instrument cluster

ECO PRO bonus range An extension of the range can be achieved by an adjusted driv ing style. This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument

cluster. The bonus range is shown in the range display. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

Driving style

In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in dicates the current efficiency of the driving style.

Seite 174

Driving tips Saving fuel

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by coasting or when braking. Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display when accelerating. The efficiency of the driving style is shown by the color of the bar: Blue display: efficient driving style as long

as the mark moves within the blue range. Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by

backing off the accelerator pedal. The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are met.

ECO PRO Tip — driving instruction The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance.

Note The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:

1. «Settings» 2. «Info display» 3. «ECO PRO Info»

ECO PRO tip — Symbols An additional symbol and a text instruction are displayed.

Symbol Measure

For efficient driving style, back off the accelerator or delay accelerating to allow time to assess road condi tions.

Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed.

Symbol Measure

Automatic transmission: switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.

Manual shift transmission: follow shifting instructions.

Manual shift transmission: engage neutral for engine stop.

Indications on the Control Display

EfficientDynamics Information on fuel consumption and technol ogy can be displayed during driving.

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «EfficientDynamics»

Displaying fuel consumption history The average fuel consumption can be dis played within an adjustable time frame. Vertical bars show consumption for the se lected time frame. Trip interruptions are represented below the bar on the time axis.

«Consumption history»

Adjusting fuel consumption history time frame

Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history 1. Open «Options». 2. «Reset consumption history»

Displaying EfficientDynamics info The current efficiency can be displayed.

«EfficientDynamics info» The following systems are displayed: Automatic engine start-stop function.

Seite 175

Saving fuel Driving tips

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Energy recovery. Climate control output. Coasting.

Display ECO PRO tips «ECO PRO Tips»

The setting is stored for the profile currently in use.

Coasting

The concept The system helps to conserve fuel. To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis sion when transmission position D is engaged. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis sion position D remains engaged. This driving condition is referred to as coast ing. As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again.

Hints Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re fer to page 173, driving mode. Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control. The function is available in a certain speed range. A forward-looking driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast ing.

Safety mode The function is not available if one of the fol lowing conditions is satisfied. DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.

Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades.

Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces sive current.

Cruise control activated.

Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are satisfied: Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not

operated. The selector lever is in transmission posi

tion D. Engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.

Display

Display in the instrument cluster The mark in the bar display be low the tachometer is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tachometer approxi mately indicates idle speed.

The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting.

Indications on the Control Display The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active. The distance traveled in the Coasting driving condition is indicated by a counter.

Seite 176

Driving tips Saving fuel

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «EfficientDynamics» 3. «EfficientDynamics info»

Deactivating the system manually The function can be deactivated in the Config ure ECO PRO, refer to page 174, menu, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when trav eling downhill. The setting is stored for the profile currently in use.

ECO PRO driving style analysis

The concept The system helps in this situation to develop an especially efficient driving style and to con serve fuel. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. Using this indication, the individual driving style can be oriented toward conserving fuel. The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. The range of the vehicle can be extended by an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display.

Functional requirement The function is only available in ECO PRO mode.

Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis

Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. «EfficientDynamics» 3. Select the symbol.

Display

Display on the Control Display

The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal ysis consists of a symbolized road route and a lookup table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv ing style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted road route be comes, arrow 1. The table of values contains stars. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are in cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, arrow 2. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during the drive. Tips about the energy saving driving style, Conserving fuel, refer to page 172.

Seite 177

Saving fuel Driving tips

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Mobility In order to always ensure your mobility, you will

find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Refueling Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Hints Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.

Diesel engines The filler neck is designed for refueling at die sel fuel pumps.

Fuel cap Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex ample.

Seite 180

Mobility Refueling

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To do this, turn the cap.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise

fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ ment and damaging the vehicle.

Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the

gas station.

Seite 181

Refueling Mobility

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Fuel recommendation Note

General fuel quality Even fuels that conform to the specifica

tions can be of low quality. Switch gas stations or use fuel from brand name producers having a higher octane level; otherwise, engine prob lems, such as poor engine starting perform ance, poorer handling characteristics or driving performance may occur.

Gasoline For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con taining metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with out metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other components.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806xx CAN: CGSB-3.511xx

xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Do not refuel with Ethanol above the maximum Ethanol proportion

Do not refuel with Ethanol above the maximum Ethanol proportion, that is, refueling with fuel that contains more than 10 % Ethanol, flex fuel or other alcohols; otherwise, damage to the engine and fuel supply could result.

Gasoline quality BMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini

mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per formance.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Fuel quality The use of poor-quality fuels may result

in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi tionally, problems relating to drivability, start ing and stalling, especially under certain envi ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail ers.

Seite 182

Mobility Fuel

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main tenance.

Diesel

Low-Sulfur Diesel The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel with low sulfur content: Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx. xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel. The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must

not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use gasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as this may damage the engine.

After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv ice center or roadside assistance. If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle. In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck, please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for instructions on how to add fuel. For more infor mation on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer to page 218.

Winter diesel To ensure that the diesel engine remains op erational in the winter, use winter diesel. It is available at gas stations during winter months. The fuel filter heating system, included as a standard feature, prevents disruption of the fuel supply while driving.

Do not add any diesel additives Do not add additives, including gasoline;

otherwise, engine damage may occur.

BMW Advanced Diesel The concept BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust system. A chemical reaction takes place inside the catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogen oxides. The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled. To be able to start the engine as usual, there must be an adequate reducing agent. Reducing agent is added by the service center.

Warming up the system In order to warm the engine up to its operating temperature after a cold start, the automatic transmission may subsequently shift up to the next higher gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Reserve display This display in the instrument cluster provides information about the distance that can still be driven with the current reserve level.

The reserve indication is dis played starting at approx. 1,000 miles/1,600 km remaining range.

Seite 183

Fuel Mobility

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Refill in good time The reducing agent must be replenished

as soon as the Reserve display appears, other wise the engine cannot be restarted.

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum The engine will continue to run even when the display shows —, as long as it is not switched off and all other operating condi tions are satisfied, sufficient fuel

for example.

Engine does not start Do not continue driving to the limit of the

remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you will not be able to restart the engine after switch ing it off.

Filling with incorrect fuel A Check Control message is displayed when the tank is filled with the incorrect fuel. After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv ice center.

System defect A Check Control message is displayed when there is a system defect.

Have the diesel exhaust fluid replenished The reducing agent is added by the service center within the context of regular mainte nance. Provided you observe this maintenance schedule, it is normally necessary to replenish the fluid once between maintenance appoint ments. It may be necessary to have the fluid replen ished several times under particular circum stances, for example, if the vehicle is driven in a particularly sporty style or if it is driven at high altitudes.

The reducing agent must be replenished as soon as the reserve display appears in the in strument cluster to avoid not being able to re start the engine.

Diesel exhaust fluid at low temperatures Due to its physical properties, it is possible that reducing agent may also need to be re plenished between regular maintenance ap pointments if it is exposed to temperatures be low + 23 /- 5 . In this case, add reducing agent only immediately before starting to drive. The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re serve display in the instrument cluster. At temperatures below + 12 /- 11 the fill level in some cases cannot be measured. After adding reducing agent, the reserve dis play is displayed only until the fill level can be measured again.

Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid yourself in exceptional cases You can replenish reducing agent yourself in exceptional cases, e.g., to get to the service center.

Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid Do not come into contact with the reduc

ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritations may result.

Handling Diesel exhaust fluid When working with reducing agent in

closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. When the bottle or container is opened, acrid smell ing fumes may escape.

Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children

Keep reducing agent out of reach of children

Avoid contact with surfaces Avoid contact of reducing agent with sur

faces of the vehicle. Damage could result.

Seite 184

Mobility Fuel

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With

this bottle and its special adapter, Diesel exhaust fluid can be replenished simply and safely.

Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32 Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your Service Center.

Refill quantity When the Reserve display starts, add at least 2 bottles of reducing agent. This corresponds to approx. 1 gallon.

Tank for reducing agent

The tank for the reducing agent is located next to the fuel tank.

Adding engine oil 1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 180. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and re

move. 3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it

will go, see arrow.

4. Press the bottle down, see arrow. The vehicle container will be filled. The container is full when the fill level in the bottle no longer changes. It is not pos sible to overfill.

5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un screw it.

6. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise. 7. Close the fuel filler flap.

After adding Diesel exhaust fluid

Note Incorrect fluids After filling with incorrect fluids, such as

antifreeze for washer water, do not start the engine, otherwise there is risk of fire.

Contact your service center.

Disposing of bottles You take your empty Diesel exhaust fluid bottles to your Service Center for disposal.

Seite 185

Fuel Mobility

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Do not dispose of empty bottles with house hold waste unless this is permitted by local regulations.

Reserve display The Reserve display will still ap pear along with the remaining range after refilling. Engine can be started. After several minutes of driving,

the Reserve indication goes out.

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum After filling, the indication — is still displayed. Only after the display goes out can the engine — be started.

1. Switch on the ignition. Display — goes out after approx. 1 minute.

2. Engine can be started.

Seite 186

Mobility Fuel

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following: The service life of the tires. Road safety. Driving comfort.

Checking the pressure Tires have a natural, consistent loss of pres sure.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres

sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle’s driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.

Tires heat up during driving, and the tire infla tion pressure increases along with the temper ature of the tire. The tire inflation pressure specifications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature. Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more

than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. After correcting the tire inflation pressure: Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 188, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 188, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver’s door pillar.

Seite 187

Wheels and tires Mobility

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other

wise, tire damage and accidents may result.

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

320i, 320i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.2 / 32

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.4 / 35

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 —

— 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

328i, 328d

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.2 / 35

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.2 / 32

Seite 188

Mobility Wheels and tires

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 —

— 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

328i xDrive, 328d xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.4 / 35

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.2 / 32

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 —

— 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

335i, 335i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.4 / 35

Seite 189

Wheels and tires Mobility

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 —

— 2.6 / 38

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 —

— 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Other wise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

320i, 320i xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 —

— 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 —

— 2.6 / 38

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 —

— 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Seite 190

Mobility Wheels and tires

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39

225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC

2.2 / 32 —

— 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 —

— 2.4 / 35

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 —

— 2.6 / 38

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 —

— 3.0 / 44

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

328i, 328i xDrive, 328d, 328d xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 17 94 V M +S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M +S RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

225/45 R 18 91 V M +S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45

Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC

2.4 / 35 —

— 2.6 / 38

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.6 / 38 —

— 2.6 / 38

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.6 / 38 —

— 2.8 / 41

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39 —

— 3.2 / 46

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

Seite 191

Wheels and tires Mobility

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 17 94 H M +S RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45

Front: 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Rear: 255/45 R 17 98 W RSC

2.4 / 35 —

— 2.6 / 38

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.6 / 38 —

— 2.6 / 38

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.6 / 38 —

— 2.8 / 41

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39 —

— 3.2 / 46

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

335i, 335i xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.7 / 39 —

— 2.8 / 41

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.7 / 39 —

— 3.0 / 44

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.9 /42 —

— 3.4 / 49

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Seite 192

Mobility Wheels and tires

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC

2.7 / 39 —

— 2.8 / 41

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 Y RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC

2.7 / 39 —

— 3.0 / 44

Front: 225/35 R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 92 Y XL RSC

2.9 /42 —

— 3.4 / 49

Compact wheel T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

Tire identification marks Tire size 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 18: rim diameter in inches 96: load rating, not for ZR tires

Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 1013: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age DOT 1013: the tire was manufactured in the 10th week 2013.

Recommendation Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

Seite 193

Wheels and tires Mobility

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

All passenger car tires must conform to Fed eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driv ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re quired by law.

Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.

RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Seite 194

Mobility Wheels and tires

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire’s circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Notes Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects: Unusual vibrations during driving. Unusual handling such as a strong ten

dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things.

In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re

duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. Have the vehicle towed or transported there. Otherwise, tire damage can become life threat ening for vehicle occupants and also other road users.

Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re sult.

Changing wheels and tires Mounting

Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Wheel and tire combination You can ask the service center about the right wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse, use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Seite 195

Wheels and tires Mobility

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom

mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body con tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi cle if they are mounted.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

New tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking- in period. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de

sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.

Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of per formance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for

the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam age and accidents can occur.

Run-flat tires If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against switching wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Seite 196

Mobility Wheels and tires

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires Label

RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de gree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.

Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 104. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 101.

Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved. Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center.

Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: 205/60 R 16. 225/55 R 16. 225/50 R 17. 225/45 R 18. Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord ing to the chain manufacturer’s instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.

Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Seite 197

Wheels and tires Mobility

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Engine compartment Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Jump-starting, negative terminal 2 Vehicle identification number 3 Washer fluid reservoir 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal 5 Engine compartment fuse box

6 Oil filler neck 7 Coolant reservoir

The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and diesel engines is located on the opposite side of the engine compartment.

Seite 198

Mobility Engine compartment

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Hood Hints

Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Never reach into the engine compart ment

Never reach into the intermediate spaces or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.

Fold down wiper arm Before opening the hood, ensure that the

wiper arms are against the windshield, or this may result in damage.

Opening the hood 1. Pull lever in the interior:

Engine is released, arrow 1.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again: Hood can be opened, arrow 2.

Indicator/warning lamps When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im mediately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Seite 199

Engine compartment Mobility

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Engine oil Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. When a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil consumption, for example, is clearly higher. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling. The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement. The electronic oil measurement has two meas uring principles. Status display Detailed measurement

Checking the oil level electronically Status display

The concept The oil level is monitored electronically during driving and shown on the Control Display. If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements A current measured value is available after ap prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter

trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed. With frequent short-distance trips, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the oil level 1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. «Engine oil level»

Oil level display messages Different messages appear on the display de pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these messages. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next 125 miles/200 km Add oil, refer to page 201.

Engine oil level too low Add oil immediately; otherwise, an insuf

ficient amount of engine oil could result in en gine damage.

Take care not to add too much engine oil. Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam age.

Detailed measurement

The concept In the detailed measurement the oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. During the measurement, the idle speed is in creased somewhat.

General information A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines.

Seite 200

Mobility Engine oil

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Requirements Vehicle is on level road. Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral

position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed.

Automatic transmission: selector lever in transmission position N or P and accelera tor pedal not depressed.

Engine is running and is at operating tem perature.

Performing a detailed measurement In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level:

1. «Vehicle Info» 2. «Vehicle status» 3. «Measure engine oil level» 4. «Start measurement» The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Duration: approx. 1 minute.

Adding engine oil General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi cle before engine oil is added.

Filler neck

Only replenish the maximum oil amount of 1 US quart/liter if the signal is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Adding oil Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

Otherwise, the engine may be damaged.

Do not add too much engine oil When too much engine oil is added, im

mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.

Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil

dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.

Oil types for refilling Hints

No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam

age.

Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Seite 201

Engine oil Mobility

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Some types of oils in some cases are not avail able in all countries.

Approved oil types

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Diesel engine

BMW Longlife-04.

Additional information about the approved types of oils can be requested from the service center.

Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be added:

Gasoline engine

API SM or superior grade specification.

Diesel engine

API ILSAC GF-5.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends having the engine oil changed by your service center.

Seite 202

Mobility Engine oil

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Engine oil change

Coolant Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Hints Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while

the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.

Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about the suitable additives are available from the service center.

Coolant level Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be

tween the minimum and maximum marks. The marks are on the side of the coolant reservoir.

Symbol Meaning

Maximum

Minimum

Filling 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir

slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex cess pressure to dissipate, and then open it.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the cap must point towards one another.

5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible.

Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen tal protection regulations when dispos ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 203

Coolant Mobility

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Maintenance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

BMW maintenance system The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the op erational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Detailed information on service requirements, refer to page 82, can be displayed on the Con trol Display.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re mote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els for additional information on service re quirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle’s Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els. These entries are proof of regular mainte nance.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Note

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may

only be used by the service center or a work shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with

Seite 204

Mobility Maintenance

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver’s side for checking the primary components in the vehi cle emissions.

Emissions The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. Canadian model: warning light indi cates the engine symbol.

The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe riod can seriously damage emission con trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Seite 205

Maintenance Mobility

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Replacing components Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side in the cargo area in a storage com partment. Open the cover.

Wiper blade replacement Note

Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.

Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer

to page 70, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.

4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the catch.

5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place.

6. Fold down the wipers. Folding down wipers before opening the hood

Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.

Lamp and bulb replacement Hints

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

Seite 206

Mobility Replacing components

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights af fected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb’s surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display elements and other equipment. These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.

Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden sation evaporates after a short time. The head lamp glasses do not need to be changed. If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this.

Headlamp setting The headlamp adjustments can be affected by changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a change, have the headlamp setting checked and corrected by Service.

Front lamps, bulb replacement

Halogen headlamps

1 Parking lamps 2 High beams/headlamp flasher 3 Low beams 4 Turn signal 5 Daytime running lights

Seite 207

Replacing components Mobility

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Accessing the turn signals and low beams Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206.

1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack ets and remove the cover.

Turn signal 21-watt bulb, PY21W

1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove.

2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re verse order of removal.

4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.

Low beams 55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re move.

2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove.

3. Pull the connector off the bulb. 4. Attach the connector to the new bulb. 5. First insert the bulb at the top with the

strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into place.

6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages.

7. Attach the cover to the wheel house.

Seite 208

Mobility Replacing components

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Accessing the daytime running lights, high beams/headlamp flasher and parking lamps Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 199. 2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re

move.

Parking lamps 6-watt bulb, H6W.

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove.

2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed in reverse order of removal. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place.

4. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages.

High beams/headlamp flasher 55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove.

2. Pull the connector off the bulb. 3. Attach the connector to the new bulb. 4. First insert the bulb at the top with the

strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into place.

5. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages.

Seite 209

Replacing components Mobility

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Daytime running lights 24-watt bulb, PW24W.

1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb connector.

2. Remove the bulb holder.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. 4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse

order of removal. During insertion, the bot tom of the bulb holder must be facing downward. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place.

5. Attach the high beam bulb connector. 6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.

Make sure that the cap engages.

Xenon headlamps

Xenon headlamps Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.

Headlamps

1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher 3 Turn signal

Low beams and high beams are designed with xenon technology. The parking lamps and daylight running lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206.

Seite 210

Mobility Replacing components

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

21-watt bulb, PY21W

1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack ets and remove the cover.

2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove.

3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re verse order of removal.

5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.

Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206. 35-watt bulb, H8.

1. Use the back side of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.

Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar row 2.

2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. Turn the bulb, arrow 2. Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock wise. Remove the bulb.

3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector and screw on the wheel house panel.

Turn signal in exterior mirror Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Seite 211

Replacing components Mobility

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Turn signal 2 Reversing lamp 3 Inside brake lamp 4 Tail lamps 5 Outside brake lamp

Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps

General information Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206. Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL. Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W. The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con tact your service center in the event of a mal function.

Use caution when replacing the bulb Use caution and proceed one step at a

time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam age to the tail lamps or vehicle.

Removing the exterior tail lamp 1. Open trunk lid. 2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve

hicle tool kit to loosen the screw, arrow 1, and remove the cover, arrow 2.

3. Use the screwdriver handle to loosen the two nuts, arrows 1 and 2, and remove. The tail lamp is still attached to a rubber mount on the outside.

4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp and carefully swing it back and out of the rub ber mount, arrow 1. Use your free hand to hold it in place in order to prevent the tail lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2.

Seite 212

Mobility Replacing components

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

5. Remove the connecting line from the clip on the bulb holder.

6. Release the catch at the top on the con nector of the connecting line and remove the connector from the bulb holder.

Replacing the bulbs 1. Loosen the four fasteners, arrow 1, on the

bulb holder and remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp, arrow 2.

2. Press the defective bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas teners.

Installing the tail lamp 1. Connect the connecting line to the tail

lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip. 2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing

ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is not damaged.

3. Position and firmly press the outer part of the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar row 1 and the inner part onto the centering

component, arrow 2. Make sure that the tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.

4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts. 5. Fit the cover in place and screw onto the

fastener. Make sure that the tubular seal is not pinched.

Lamps in the trunk lid

General information Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206. Reversing lamps: 16-watt bulb, PW16W. Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W

Accessing the lamps 1. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve

hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re move the six screws on the trim.

2. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid, starting at the edge and working toward the area around the recessed grips. Make sure that the trim does not become stuck.

3. Carefully swing out the trim.

Seite 213

Replacing components Mobility

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Replacing the reversing lamp and inner brake lamp 1. Loosen the two holders, arrow 1 and pull

down on the lamp holder to remove, ar row 2.

2. Unscrew the defective bulb from the socket counterclockwise for reversing or rear fog lamps.

3. Insert the new bulb.

Installing the bulb holder 1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide

pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.

2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that the two exterior holders latch into place.

3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and secure.

Tail lamp, license plate lamp and central brake lamp Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206.

These lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Changing wheels Hints The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire. When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated at the positions shown.

Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.

Seite 214

Mobility Replacing components

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble.

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service cen ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available and that any Check Control mes sages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

Note Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the

factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.

General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. The battery may need to be charged in the fol lowing cases: When making frequent short-distance

drives. If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe

riods, longer than a month.

Starting aid terminals In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 219, in the engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:

Seat and mirror memory: store the posi tions again.

Time: update. Date: update. Navigation system: wait for the operability

of the navigation.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses Hints

Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re sulting in a fire in the vehicle.

Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the cargo area.

In the engine compartment 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen

the three cover screws, arrow 1.

2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.

Seite 215

Replacing components Mobility

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3. 4. Press the four fasteners and remove the

cover.

Attaching the covers 1. When attaching the cover, make sure that

all four fasteners are engaged. 2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and

then thread it between the bars.

3. Press down on the holder and tighten the three screws.

In the cargo area

Raise the cargo floor panel.

Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.

Seite 216

Mobility Replacing components

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Intelligent Emergency Request Requirements The radio ready state is switched on. The Assist system is functional. The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has

been activated.

General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Hints Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency

Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor able conditions.

Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

button lights up. The LED lights up: an Emergency Request

was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab lished.

The LED flashes when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab lished. When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances. For this purpose, data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle

Seite 217

Breakdown assistance Mobility

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Response Center.

If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re sponse Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard for the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately af ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located on the inside of the trunk lid. To remove, loosen the bracket.

First aid kit Note Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage

The first aid kit is located in the cargo area in a storage compartment.

Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain as sistance there in the event of a vehicle break down.

Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be established di rectly. For additional information, see user’s manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi cation.

Jump-starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca bles with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.

Seite 218

Mobility Breakdown assistance

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in

jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor mation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other wise, there is the danger of short circuits.

Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en gine compartment acts as the battery’s posi tive terminal. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid

terminal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis tance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in creased idle speed. If the vehicle being started has a diesel en gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way.

Seite 219

Breakdown assistance Mobility

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

If the first starting attempt is not success ful, wait a few minutes before making an other attempt in order to allow the dis charged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re

verse order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towing Note

Tow-starting and towing When tow-starting and towing the vehi

cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.

Switch off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to page 104.

Automatic transmission: transporting your vehicle

Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load

ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc cur.

Tow truck

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only.

Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Towing Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,

vehicle damage or accidents may occur.

Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be un available.

Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.

Larger steering wheel movements are re quired.

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle response.

Seite 220

Mobility Breakdown assistance

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Tow truck

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Towing other vehicles

General information Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle re sponse.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Maneuvering capability is limited during

cornering. The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an offset.

Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.

Tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is in the onboard vehicle tool kit located in a storage compart ment on the right side in the cargo area. Open the cover.

Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.

Seite 221

Breakdown assistance Mobility

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.

Screw thread

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting

Automatic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied.

Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 218. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat alytic converter, only tow-start while the en gine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.

2. Ignition, refer to page 63, on. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi ately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 222

Mobility Breakdown assistance

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Care Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Car washes Hints

Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 /60 . If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main tained. Holding them too close or using exces sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the user’s manual for the high-pressure washer.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter.

Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Automatic car washes

Hints Give preference to cloth car washes or

those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms.

Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 69, to avoid unintentional wiper acti vation.

In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instruc tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 45.

Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.

Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps: Manual transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash. 2. Shift to neutral. 3. Switch the engine off. 4. Switch on the ignition. Automatic transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.

Seite 223

Care Mobility

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is dis played.

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; otherwise, the transmission position P is engaged and damages can result.

To start the engine:

1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button without step ping on the brake turns the ignition off. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Transmission position Transmission position P is engaged automati cally: When the ignition is switched off. After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlamps Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due

to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.

Completely remove all residues on the win dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.

Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af fect the vehicle’s paintwork. Tailor the fre quency and extent of your car care to these influences. Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

Seite 224

Mobility Care

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Suitable care products are available from the service center.

Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita ble interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or

other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 /60 . Follow the manufac turer’s instructions. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic

ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components These include: Imitation leather surfaces. Headliner. Lamp lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matte black spray-coated components. Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Lightly dampen the cloth with water. Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.

Seite 225

Care Mobility

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again after they were removed for clean ing, for example.

Floor mats can be removed from the passen ger compartment for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/cameras To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/screens Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber cloth.

Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household

cleansers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components.

Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.

Long-term vehicle storage When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Additional information is available from the service center.

Seite 226

Mobility Care

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Seite 227

Care Mobility

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Reference This chapter contains the technical data and an

index that will quickly take you to the information you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Technical data Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip

ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Dimensions

BMW 3 Series Limousine

Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.9/2,031

Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.3/1,811

Height with roof antenna inches/mm 56.7/1,441

Height without roof antenna inches/mm 56.3/1,429

Length inches/mm 182.1/4,627

Wheel base inches/mm 110.6/2,810

Smallest turning circle diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3

Smallest turning circle diameter with xDrive ft/m 38.4/11.7

Weights The values preceding the slash apply to vehi cles with manual transmission; the values fol

lowing the slash apply to vehicles with auto matic transmission.

320i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs kg

4,300/4,340 1,950/1,969

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,985/900

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,480/1,125

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480

Seite 230

Reference Technical data

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

328i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs kg

4,365/4,420 1,980/2,005

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,015/914

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,510/1,139

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480

335i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs kg

4,540/4,565 2,059/2,071

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,140/971

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,535/1,150

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480

320i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs kg

4,465/4,505 2,025/2,043

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,125/964

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,510/1,139

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480

Seite 231

Technical data Reference

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

328i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,585/2,080

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,170/984

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,555/1,159

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480

335i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs kg

4,675/4,695 2,121/2,130

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,280/1,034

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,560/1,161

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480

328d

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,365/1,980

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,995/905

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,490/1,129

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480

328d xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,540/2,059

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,160/980

Seite 232

Reference Technical data

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

328d xDrive

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,525/1,145

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank Gasoline: 15.8/60 Diesel: 15/57

Fuel quality, refer to page 182

Seite 233

Technical data Reference

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys

tem 116 ACC, Active Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 121 Acceleration Assistant, refer

to Launch Control 74 Activated-charcoal filter 149 Active Blind Spot Detec

tion 114 Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 121 Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 115 Adaptive Light Control 92 Additives, oil 201 Adjustments, seats/head re

straints 49 After washing vehicle 224 Airbags 96 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 97 Air circulation, refer to Recir

culated-air mode 145, 148 Air, dehumidifying, refer to

Cooling function 145, 147 Air distribution,

manual 145, 148 Air flow, air conditioner 145 Air flow, automatic climate

control 148 Air pressure, tires 187 Air vents, refer to Ventila

tion 149 Alarm system 44 Alarm, unintentional 45 All around the center con

sole 16 All around the headliner 17

All around the steering wheel 14

All-season tires, refer to Win ter tires 196

All-wheel-drive 117 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 152 Alternative oil types 202 Antifreeze, washer fluid 70 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 116 Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 116 Approved axle load 230 Approved engine oils 202 Arrival time 87 Ash tray 155 Assistance, Roadside Assis

tance 218 Assistance when driving

off 120 Assist system information, on

Control Display 89 AUTO intensity 147 Automatic car wash 223 Automatic climate con

trol 144 Automatic climate control

with enhanced features 146 Automatic Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 121 Automatic Curb Monitor 57 Automatic deactivation, front

passenger airbags 98 Automatic headlamp con

trol 92 Automatic locking 43 Automatic recirculated-air

control 148 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 71

AUTO program, automatic cli mate control 147

AUTO program, climate con trol 145

AUTO program, intensity 147 Auto Start/Stop function 65 Average fuel consumption 86 Average speed 86 Axle loads, weights 230

B Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 51 Backrest, width 51 Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 218 Bar for tow-starting/

towing 221 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 215 Battery replacement, vehicle

remote control 34 Battery, vehicle 214 Belts, safety belts 52 Beverage holder, cu

pholder 161 Blinds, sun protection 47 BMW Advanced Diesel 183 BMW Assist, see user’s

manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation

BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys

tem 204 Bonus range, ECO PRO 174 Bottle holder, refer to Cu

pholder 161 Brake assistant 116

Seite 234

Reference Everything from A to Z

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Brake discs, breaking in 166 Brake force display 115 Brake lamps, brake force dis

play 115 Brake lights, adaptive 115 Brake pads, breaking in 166 Braking, hints 167 Breakdown assis

tance 217, 218 Breaking in 166 Brightness of Control Dis

play 89 Bulb replacement 206 Bulb replacement, front 207 Bulb replacement, halogen

headlamps 207 Bulb replacement, rear 212 Bulb replacement, xenon

headlamps 210 Bulbs and lamps 206 Button, RES 124 Button, Start/Stop 63 Bypassing, refer to Jump-

starting 218

C California Proposition 65

Warning 7 Camera, care 226 Camera, rearview cam

era 133 Camera, Side View 136 Camera, Top View 137 Can holder, refer to Cu

pholder 161 Car battery 214 Car care products 224 Care, displays 226 Care, vehicle 224 Cargo 169 Cargo area, enlarging 157 Cargo area lid 40 Cargo area, storage compart

ments 162 Cargo, securing 170

Cargo straps, securing cargo 170

Car key, refer to Remote con trol 34

Carpet, care 226 Car wash 223 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 167 CBS Condition Based Serv

ice 204 CD/Multimedia, see user’s

manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation

Center armrest 160 Center console 16 Center-Lock, see button for

central locking 37 Central locking system 37 Central screen, refer to Con

trol Display 18 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7 Changing parts 206 Changing wheels 214 Changing wheels/tires 195 Check Control 78 Checking the oil level elec

tronically 200 Children, seating position 59 Children, transporting

safely 59 Child restraint fixing sys

tem 59 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 60 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 59 Child safety locks 62 Child seat, mounting 59 Child seats 59 Chrome parts, care 225 Cigarette lighter 155 Cleaning, displays 226 Climate control 144, 146 Clock 81

Closing/opening from in side 40

Closing/opening via door lock 39

Closing/opening with remote control 38

Clothes hooks 161 Coasting 176 Coasting with engine decou

pled, coasting 176 Coasting with idling en

gine 176 Cockpit 14 Cold starting, refer to Starting

the engine 64 Collision warning with braking

function 108 Collision warning with City

Braking function 105 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signals 68 Combination switch, refer to

Wiper system 68 Comfort Access 41 COMFORT program, Dy

namic Driving Control 119 Compartments in the

doors 160 Compass 153 Computer 86 Condensation on win

dows 148 Condensation under the vehi

cle 168 Condition Based Service

CBS 204 Configuring drive pro

gram 119 Confirmation signal 43 ConnectedDrive, see user’s

manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation

ConnectedDrive Services Connecting electrical devi

ces 155

Seite 235

Everything from A to Z Reference

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Control Display 18 Control Display, settings 88 Controller 18, 19 Control systems, driving sta

bility 116 Convenient opening 38 Coolant 203 Coolant temperature 81 Cooling function 145, 147 Cooling, maximum 147 Cooling system 203 Corrosion on brake discs 168 Cruise control 128 Cruise control, active with

Stop & Go 121 Cruising range 81 Cupholder 161 Current fuel consumption 82

D Damage, tires 195 Damping control, dy

namic 117 Data, technical 230 Date 81 Daytime running lights 92 Defrosting, refer to defrosting

the windows 145 Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 148 Defrosting the windows 145 Dehumidifying, air 145, 147 Destination distance 87 Diesel exhaust fluid, at low

temperatures 184 Diesel exhaust fluid, having

refilled 184 Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini

mum 184 Diesel exhaust fluid, replen

ishing yourself 184 Diesel particulate filter 167 Digital clock 81 Digital compass 153 Dimensions 230

Dimmable exterior mirrors 57 Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 58 Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals 68 Display, electronic, instru

ment cluster 77 Display in windshield 89 Display lighting, refer to In

strument lighting 94 Displays 75 Displays, cleaning 226 Disposal, coolant 203 Disposal, vehicle battery 215 Distance control, refer to

PDC 130 Distance to destination 87 Divided screen view, split

screen 24 Door lock, refer to Remote

control 34 Drive-off assistant 120 Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC 116 Driver assistance, see Intelli

gent Safety 104 Driving Assistant, see Intelli

gent Safety 104 Driving Dynamics Con

trol 118 Driving instructions, breaking

in 166 Driving mode 118 Driving notes, general 166 Driving stability control sys

tems 116 Driving style analysis 177 Driving tips 166 DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol 116 DTC Dynamic Traction Con

trol 117 Dynamic Damping Con

trol 117 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 116

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 117

E ECO PRO 173 ECO PRO, bonus range 174 ECO PRO display 173 ECO PRO driving mode 173 ECO PRO driving style analy

sis 177 ECO PRO mode 173 ECO PRO Tip — driving in

struction 175 EfficientDynamics 175 Electronic displays, instru

ment cluster 77 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 116 Emergency detection, remote

control 35 Emergency release, door

lock 40 Emergency release, fuel filler

flap 180 Emergency Request 217 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 218 Emergency start function, en

gine start 35 Emergency unlocking, trunk

lid 41 Energy Control 82 Energy recovery 82 Engine, automatic Start/Stop

function 65 Engine, automatic switch-

off 65 Engine compartment 198 Engine compartment, work

ing in 199 Engine coolant 203 Engine idling when driving,

coasting 176 Engine oil 200 Engine oil, adding 201

Seite 236

Reference Everything from A to Z

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Engine oil additives 201 Engine oil change 202 Engine oil filler neck 201 Engine oil temperature 80 Engine oil types, alterna

tive 202 Engine oil types, ap

proved 202 Engine start during malfunc

tion 35 Engine start, jump-start

ing 218 Engine start, refer to Starting

the engine 64 Engine stop 65 Engine temperature 80 Entering a car wash 223 Equipment, interior 151 ESP Electronic Stability Pro

gram, refer to DSC 116 Exchanging wheels/tires 195 Exhaust system 167 Exterior mirror, automatic

dimming feature 57 Exterior mirrors 56 External start 218 External temperature dis

play 81 External temperature warn

ing 81 Eyes for securing cargo 170

F Failure message, refer to

Check Control 78 False alarm, refer to Uninten

tional alarm 45 Fan, refer to Air

flow 145, 148 Fault displays, refer to Check

Control 78 Filler neck for engine oil 201 Fine wood, care 225 First aid kit 218

Fitting for towing, refer to Tow fitting 221

Flat tire, changing wheels 214

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 102 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 99 Flat tire, warning

lamp 100, 103 Flooding 167 Floor carpet, care 226 Floor mats, care 226 Fogged up windows 145 Fold down the rear seat back

rest, see Though-loading system 157

Fold-out position, windshield wipers 70

Foot brake 167 Front airbags 96 Front fog lamps 94 Front fog lamps, front, bulb

replacement 211 Front lamps 207 Front passenger airbags, au

tomatic deactivation 98 Front passenger airbags, indi

cator lamp 98 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 102 Fuel 182 Fuel cap 180 Fuel consumption, current 82 Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump tion 86

Fuel filler flap 180 Fuel gauge 80 Fuel quality 182 Fuel recommendation 182 Fuel, tank capacity 233 Fuse 215

G Garage door opener, refer to

Universal garage door opener 151

Gasoline 182 Gasoline quality 182 Gear change, automatic

transmission 72 Gear shift indicator 83 General driving notes 166 Glass sunroof, powered 47 Glove compartment 159 Gross vehicle weight, ap

proved 230

H Handbrake, refer to parking

brake 67 Hand-held transmitter, alter

nating code 152 Hazard warning flashers 217 Head airbags 96 Headlamp control, auto

matic 92 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture 91 Headlamp flasher 68 Headlamp glass 207 Headlamps 207 Headlamps, care 224 Headlamp washer system 68 Headliner 17 Head restraints 49 Head restraints, front 53 Head restraints, rear 54 Head-up Display 89 Head-up Display, care 226 Heavy cargo, stowing 170 High-beam Assistant 93 High beams 68 High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 93 Hills 168

Seite 237

Everything from A to Z Reference

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 120

Hints 6 Holder for beverages 161 Homepage 6 Hood 199 Horn 14 Hotel function, trunk lid 41 Hot exhaust system 167 HUD Head-up Display 89 Hydroplaning 167

I Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 81 Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 81 Identification marks, tires 193 Identification number, refer to

Important features in the en gine compartment 198

iDrive 18 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control 34 Ignition off 63 Ignition on 63 Indication of a flat

tire 100, 103 Indicator and warning

lamps 78 Individual air distribu

tion 145, 148 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 35 Inflation pressure, tires 187 Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires 102 Info display, refer to Com

puter 86 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 100 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 103 Instrument cluster 75

Instrument cluster, electronic displays 77

Instrument lighting 94 Integrated key 34 Intelligent Emergency Re

quest 217 Intelligent Safety 104 Intensity, AUTO pro

gram 147 Interior equipment 151 Interior lamps 94 Interior lamps via remote con

trol 38 Interior motion sensor 45 Interior rearview mirror, auto

matic dimming feature 58 Interior rearview mirror, com

pass 153 Interior rearview mirror, man

ually dimmable 58 Internet page 6 Interval display, service re

quirements 82

J Jacking points for the vehicle

jack 214 Joystick, automatic transmis

sion 72 Jump-starting 218

K Key/remote control 34 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 41 Key Memory, refer to Per

sonal Profile 35 Kickdown, automatic trans

mission 72 Knee airbag 96

L Lamp replacement 206

Lamp replacement, front 207 Lamp replacement, rear 212 Lamps 91 Lamps and bulbs 206 Lane departure warning 112 Lane margin, warning 112 Language on Control Dis

play 88 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 170 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 60 Launch Control 74 Leather, care 224 LEDs, light-emitting di

odes 207 Letters and numbers, enter

ing 25 Light alloy wheels, care 225 Light control 92 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 207 Lighter 155 Lighting 91 Lighting via remote con

trol 38 Light switch 91 Load 170 Loading 169 Lock, door 39 Locking/unlocking from in

side 40 Locking/unlocking via door

lock 39 Locking/unlocking with re

mote control 38 Locking, automatic 43 Locking, central 37 Locking, settings 43 Lock, power window 46 Locks, doors, and win

dows 62 Low beams 91 Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 93 Lower back support 51

Seite 238

Reference Everything from A to Z

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Low-Sulfur Diesel 183 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 171 Lumbar support 51

M Maintenance 204 Maintenance require

ments 204 Maintenance, service require

ments 82 Maintenance system,

BMW 204 Malfunction displays, refer to

Check Control 78 Manual air distribu

tion 145, 148 Manual air flow 145, 148 Manual mode, transmis

sion 73 Manual operation, door

lock 40 Manual operation, exterior

mirrors 57 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 180 Manual operation, Park Dis

tance Control PDC 131 Manual operation, rearview

camera 133 Manual operation, Side

View 136 Manual operation, Top

View 137 Manual transmission 71 Marking on approved

tires 196 Marking, run-flat tires 197 Master key, refer to Remote

control 34 Maximum cooling 147 Maximum speed, display 83 Maximum speed, winter

tires 196 Measure, units of 89

Medical kit 218 Memory, seat, mirror 55 Menu, EfficientDynamics 175 Menu in instrument clus

ter 85 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Menus, refer to iDrive operat

ing concept 20 Messages, refer to Check

Control 78 Microfilter 146, 149 Minimum tread, tires 195 Mirror 56 Mirror memory 55 Mobile communication devi

ces in the vehicle 167 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 7 Moisture in headlamp 207 Monitor, refer to Control Dis

play 18 Mounting of child restraint fix

ing systems 59 Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 14

N Navigation, see user’s manual

for Navigation, Entertain ment and Communication

Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 53

Neck restraints, rear, refer to Head restraints 54

Neutral cleaner, see wheel cleaner 225

New wheels and tires 195 No Passing Information 83 Nylon rope for tow-starting/

towing 221

O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 204

OBD, see OBD Onboard Di agnosis 204

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 134

Octane rating, refer to Gaso line quality 182

Odometer 81 Office, see user’s manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Oil 200 Oil, adding 201 Oil additives 201 Oil change 202 Oil change interval, service

requirements 82 Oil filler neck 201 Oil types, alternative 202 Oil types, approved 202 Old batteries, disposal 215 Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 18 Onboard vehicle tool kit 206 Opening and closing 34 Opening and closing, from in

side 40 Opening and closing via door

lock 39 Opening and closing, with re

mote control 38 Opening the trunk lid with no-

touch activation 42 Operating concept, iDrive 18 Optional equipment, standard

equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Auto

matic recirculated-air con trol 148

Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 81

P Paint, vehicle 224 Parallel parking assistant 138

Seite 239

Everything from A to Z Reference

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Park Distance Control PDC 130

Parked-car ventilation 149 Parked vehicle, condensa

tion 168 Parking aid, refer to PDC 130 Parking assistant 138 Parking brake 67 Parking lamps 91 Particulate filter 167 Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 57 Pathway lines, rearview cam

era 134 PDC Park Distance Con

trol 130 Pedestrian warning with city

braking function 110 Personal Profile 35 Pinch protection system,

glass sunroof 48 Pinch protection system, win

dows 46 Plastic, care 225 Power failure 215 Power sunroof, glass 47 Power windows 45 Pressure, tire air pres

sure 187 Pressure warning FTM,

tires 102 Profile, refer to Personal Pro

file 35 Programmable memory but

tons, iDrive 24 Protective function, glass

sunroof 48 Protective function, win

dows 46 Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controller 18, 19

R Radiator fluid 203

Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 34

Radio ready state 64 Radio, see user’s manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Rain sensor 69 Rear lamps 212 Rear socket 156 Rearview camera 133 Rearview mirror 56 Rear window de

froster 145, 148 Recirculated-air filter 149 Recirculated-air

mode 145, 148 Recommended tire

brands 196 Refueling 180 Remaining range 81 Remote control/key 34 Remote control, malfunc

tion 39 Remote control, univer

sal 151 Replacement fuse 215 Replacing parts 206 Replacing wheels/tires 195 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 124 Reserve warning, refer to

Range 81 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 100 Retaining straps, securing

cargo 170 Retreaded tires 196 Roadside parking lamps 92 Roller sunblinds 47 RON gasoline quality 182 Roof load capacity 230 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 171 Rope for tow-starting/

towing 221

RSC Run Flat System Com ponent, refer to Run-flat tires 197

Rubber components, care 225

Run-flat tires 197

S Safe braking 167 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv

er’s seat and front passen ger seat 53

Safety belts 52 Safety belts, care 225 Safety switch, windows 46 Safety systems, airbags 96 Saving fuel 172 Screen, refer to Control Dis

play 18 Screwdriver 206 Screw thread for tow fit

ting 222 Seat and mirror memory 55 Seat belts, refer to Safety

belts 52 Seat heating, front 52 Seat heating, rear 52 Seating position for chil

dren 59 Seats 49 Selection list in instrument

cluster 85 Selector lever, automatic

transmission 72 Sensors, care 226 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements, Condi

tion Based Service CBS 204

Service requirements, dis play 82

Service, Roadside Assis tance 218

Services, ConnectedDrive

Seite 240

Reference Everything from A to Z

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Settings, locking/unlock ing 43

Settings on Control Dis play 88

Settings, storing for seat, mir ror 55

Shifting, automatic transmis sion 71

Shifting, manual transmis sion 71

Shift paddles on steering wheel 73

Side airbags 96 Side View 135 Signaling, horn 14 Signals when unlocking 43 Sitting safely 49 Size 230 Slide/tilt glass roof 47 Snow chains 197 Socket 155 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag

nostics 204 Soot particulate filter 167 SOS button 217 Spare fuse 215 Specified engine oil

types 202 Speed, average 86 Speed limit detection, on

board computer 87 Speed limiter, display 83 Speed Limit Information 83 Speed limit in the com

puter 87 Split screen 24 SPORT+ — program, Dynamic

Driving Control 118 Sport automatic transmis

sion 73 Sport displays, torque dis

play, performance dis play 87

SPORT program, Dynamic Driving Control 118

Sport program, transmis sion 73

Sport steering, variable 118 Stability control systems 116 Start/stop, automatic func

tion 65 Start/Stop button 63 Start function during malfunc

tion 35 Starting the engine 64 Status display, tires 99 Status information, iDrive 23 Status of Owner’s Manual 6 Steering wheel, adjusting 58 Steering wheel heating 58 Steptronic, automatic trans

mission 71 Stopping the engine 65 Storage compartment in the

rear 161 Storage compartments 159 Storage compartments, loca

tions 159 Storage, tires 196 Storing the vehicle 226 Summer tires, tread 194 Supplementary text mes

sage 79 Surround View 132 Switch for Dynamic Driv

ing 118 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 150 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 23

T Tachometer 80 Tailgate 40 Tailgate opening with no-

touch activation 42 Tailgate via remote con

trol 38 Tail lamps 212

Technical changes, refer to Safety 7

Technical data 230 Telephone, see user’s manual

for Navigation, Entertain ment and Communication

Temperature, automatic cli mate control 145, 147

Temperature display, external temperature 81

Temperature, engine oil 80 Tempomat, refer to Active

Cruise Control 121 Terminal, starting aid 219 Text message, supplemen

tary 79 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 44 Theft protection, refer to

Central locking system 37 Thigh support 51 Through-loading system 157 Tilt alarm sensor 45 Time of arrival 87 Tire damage 195 Tire identification marks 193 Tire inflation pressure 187 Tire inflation pressure moni

tor, refer to FTM 102 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 99 Tires, changing 195 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 187 Tires, run-flat tires 197 Tire tread 194 Tone, see user’s manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Tools 206 Top View 136 Total vehicle weight 230 Touchpad 21 Tow fitting 221 Towing 220 Tow-starting 220

Seite 241

Everything from A to Z Reference

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13

Tow truck 221 TPM Tire Pressure Moni

tor 99 Traction control 117 TRACTION program, Dy

namic Driving Control 117 Transmission, automatic 71 Transmission, manual 71 Transporting children

safely 59 Tread, tires 194 Trip computer 87 Triple turn signal activa

tion 68 Trip odometer 81 Truck for tow-starting/

towing 221 Trunk lid 40 Trunk lid, emergency unlock

ing 41 Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Trunk lid opening with no-

touch activation 42 Trunk lid via remote con

trol 38 Turning circle lines, rearview

camera 134 Turn signals, operation 68 Turn signals, rear, bulb re

placement 212

U Unintentional alarm 45 Units of measure 89 Universal remote control 151 Unlock button, automatic

transmission 72 Unlocking/locking from in

side 40 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 39 Unlocking/locking with re

mote control 38 Unlocking, settings 43

Updates made after the edito rial deadline 6

Upholstery care 225 USB interface 156

V Variable sport steering 118 Vehicle battery 214 Vehicle battery, replac

ing 215 Vehicle, breaking in 166 Vehicle care 224 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification number,

refer to Identification num ber in the engine compart ment 198

Vehicle jack 214 Vehicle paint 224 Vehicle storage 226 Vehicle wash 223 Ventilation 149 Ventilation, refer to Parked-

car ventilation 149 Voice activation system 26

W Warning indicators 78 Warning lamps 78 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 78 Warning triangle 218 Washer fluid 70 Washer nozzles, wind

shield 70 Washer system 68 Washing, vehicle 223 Water on roads 167 Weights 230 Welcome lamps 91 Wheel cleaner 225 Wheels, changing 195 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 187

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 102

Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 99

Window defroster, rear 145, 148

Windows, powered 45 Windshield washer fluid 70 Windshield washer noz

zles 70 Windshield washer sys

tem 68 Windshield wiper 68 Windshield wipers, fold-out

position 70 Winter diesel 183 Winter storage, care 226 Winter tires, suitable

tires 196 Winter tires, tread 194 Wiper blades, replacing 206 Wiper fluid 70 Wiper system 68 Wood, care 225 Word match concept, naviga

tion 25 Wrench 206

X xDrive 117 Xenon headlamps, bulb re

placement 210

Seite 242

Reference Everything from A to Z

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 — X/13